Tnc 620 руководство пользователя

1. Manuals
2. Brands
3. HEIDENHAIN Manuals
4. Control Systems
5. TNC 620
6. User manual

• Page 1
  TNC 620 User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming NC Software 817600-01 817601-01 817605-01 English (en) 3/2014…
• Page 2
  Go directly to blocks, cycles and parameter functions Program run, single block Potentiometer for feed rate Program run, full sequence and spindle speed Feed rate Spindle speed Programming modes Function Programming Test run TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 3
  Conclude block and exit entry coordinates Circular arc with center Clear numerical entry or TNC error message Circle with radius Abort dialog, delete program section Circular arc with tangential connection Chamfer/Corner rounding TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 4
  Controls of the TNC TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 5
  Fundamentals…
• Page 6
  Would you like any changes, or have you found any errors? We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you. Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 7
  Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine. Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users.
• Page 8
  Fundamentals TNC model, software and features Software options The TNC 620 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions: Software option 1 (option number 08) ■…
• Page 9
  TNC model, software and features Advanced programming features software option (option number 19) ■ FK free contour Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic programming support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC ■ Fixed cycles Peck drilling, reaming, boring, counterboring, centering (Cycles 201 to 205, 208, 240, 241) ■…
• Page 10
  Continuous adaptation of the parameters of the adaptive precontrolling to the actual weight of the workpiece during machining Active Chatter Control (ACC) software option (option number 145) Fully automatic function for chatter control during machining TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 11
  Legal information This product uses open source software. Further information is available on the control under Programming and Editing operating mode MOD function License Info soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 12
  «, page 484). New function for rounding corners («Rounding corners: M197», page 360). External access to the TNC can now be blocked with a MOD function («External access», page 533). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 13
  User’s Manual for Cycle Programming). With the «Basic Rotation» probing cycle, workpiece misalignment can now be compensated for via a table rotation («Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table», page 477) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 14
  DEPTH REFERENCE was introduced in order to evaluate the T ANGLE (see User’s Manual for Cycle Programming). The probing cycle 4 MEASURING IN 3-D was introduced (see User’s Manual for Cycle Programming). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 15
  (see User’s Manual for Cycle Programming). In Cycle 205 Universal Pecking you can now use parameter Q208 to define a feed rate for retraction (see User’s Manual for Cycle Programming). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 16
  Fundamentals TNC model, software and features TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 17
  Contents First Steps with the TNC 620………………….. 47 Introduction………………………..67 Programming: Fundamentals, file management……………..85 Programming: Programming aids………………..129 Programming: Tools……………………157 Programming: Programming contours………………185 Programming: Data transfer from DXF files or plain-language contours……. 237 Programming: Subprograms and program section repeats………… 255 Programming: Q Parameters…………………..271…
• Page 18
  Contents TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 19: Table Of Contents

  First Steps with the TNC 620………………….. 47 Overview…………………………48 Machine switch-on……………………..48 Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference points……….48 Programming the first part……………………49 Selecting the correct operating mode………………..49 The most important TNC keys……………………49 Creating a new program/file management………………… 50 Defining a workpiece blank……………………

• Page 20
  Additional status displays……………………74 Window Manager……………………..80 Task bar…………………………81 SELinux security software……………………82 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels……..83 3-D touch probes (Touch Probe Function software option)…………..83 HR electronic handwheels……………………84 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 21
  Absolute and incremental workpiece positions………………89 Selecting the datum……………………..90 Opening programs and entering………………….91 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational format……….91 Define the blank: BLK FORM……………………. 92 Opening a new part program……………………. 94 Programming tool movements in conversational………………. 95 Actual position capture……………………..97…
• Page 22
  Sorting files……………………….116 Additional functions……………………..117 Additional tools for management of external file types…………….118 Data transfer to/from an external data medium………………. 123 The TNC in a network…………………….. 125 USB devices on the TNC……………………126 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 23
  Generate/do not generate graphics during programming…………..141 Generating a graphic for an existing program………………141 Block number display ON/OFF………………….142 Erasing the graphic……………………..142 Showing grid lines……………………..142 Magnification or reduction of details………………..143 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 24
  Informational texts……………………..148 Saving service files……………………..148 Calling the TNCguide help system………………….. 149 TNCguide context-sensitive help system………………150 Application……………………….. 150 Working with the TNCguide……………………. 151 Downloading current help files………………….155 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 25
  Importing tool tables……………………..170 Pocket table for tool changer…………………… 171 Call tool data……………………….174 Tool change……………………….176 Tool usage test……………………….179 Tool compensation……………………..181 Introduction……………………….181 Tool length compensation……………………181 Tool radius compensation……………………182 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 26
  CircleCR with defined radius…………………… 206 Circle CT with tangential connection………………..208 Example: Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates……….209 Example: Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates…………..210 Example: Full circle with Cartesian coordinates………………. 211 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 27
  Free straight line programming………………….224 Free circular path programming………………….225 Input options……………………….226 Auxiliary points……………………….229 Relative data……………………….230 Example: FK programming 1…………………… 232 Example: FK programming 2…………………… 233 Example: FK programming 3…………………… 234 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 28
  Opening a DXF file……………………..239 Working with the DXF converter………………….239 Basic settings……………………….240 Setting layers……………………….242 Defining the datum……………………..243 Selecting and saving a contour………………….245 Selecting and saving machining positions……………….. 249 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 29
  Repeating program section repeats………………….265 Repeating a subprogram……………………266 Programming examples……………………267 Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds………………267 Example: Groups of holes……………………268 Example: Group of holes with several tools………………269 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 30
  FN 18: SYS-DATUM READ: Reading system data…………….293 FN 19: PLC: Transfer values to PLC………………… 302 FN 20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC synchronization…………….. 302 FN 29: PLC: Transfer values to the PLC………………..304 FN 37: EXPORT………………………..304 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 31
  Copying a substring from a string parameter………………322 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value…………….323 Checking a string parameter…………………….324 Finding the length of a string parameter………………..325 Comparing alphabetic sequence………………….326 Reading machine parameters………………….. 327 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 32
  Measurement results from touch probe cycles (see also User’s Manual for Cycle Programming)..333 9.13 Programming examples……………………335 Example: Ellipse………………………. 335 Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter…………..337 Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill…………….339 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 33
  Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140……………356 Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141………………357 Deleting basic rotation: M143…………………..358 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148…………359 Rounding corners: M197……………………360 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 34
  TRANS DATUM RESET……………………. 374 11.6 Creating Text Files……………………..375 Application……………………….. 375 Opening and exiting text files…………………..375 Editing texts……………………….376 Deleting and re-inserting characters, words and lines…………….376 Editing text blocks……………………..377 Finding text sections……………………..378 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 35
  Switching between table and form view………………..381 FN 26: TAPOPEN: Open a freely definable table…………….. 382 FN 27: TAPWRITE: Write to a freely definable table…………….383 FN 28: TAPREAD: Read from a freely definable table…………….. 384 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 36
  Mode of action of the programmed feed rate………………419 Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis coordinates…………..419 Type of interpolation between the starting and end position…………… 421 Resetting the TCPM FUNCTION………………….422 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 37
  Using other tools: Delta values………………….425 3-D compensation without TCPM………………….425 Face Milling: 3D compensation with TCPM………………426 Peripheral Milling: 3-D radius compensation with TCPM and radius compensation (RL/RR)….427 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 38
  Contents 13 Programming: Pallet editor………………….429 13.1 Pallet Management (software option)………………..430 Application……………………….. 430 Select pallet table……………………..432 Exiting the pallet file……………………..432 Run pallet file……………………….432 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 39
  Recording measured values from the touch-probe cycles…………..468 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table……….469 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table………. 470 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 40
  Limitations on working with the tilting function……………….491 To activate manual tilting:……………………492 Setting the current tool-axis direction as the active machining direction……….493 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system……………… 494 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 41: Tnc 620 | User’s Manual Heidenhain Conversational Programming | 3/2014

  15 Positioning with Manual Data Input………………495 15.1 Programming and executing simple machining operations…………496 Positioning with manual data input (MDI)……………….. 496 Protecting and erasing programs in $MDI………………..499 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 42
  Any entry into program (mid-program startup)………………523 Returning to the contour……………………525 16.6 Automatic program start……………………526 Application……………………….. 526 16.7 Optional block skip……………………..527 Application……………………….. 527 Inserting the «/» character……………………527 Erasing the «/» character……………………527 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 43
  16.8 Optional program-run interruption………………..528 Application……………………….. 528 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 44
  17.5 Position Display Types……………………536 Application……………………….. 536 17.6 Unit of Measurement……………………. 537 Application……………………….. 537 17.7 Displaying operating times…………………… 537 Application……………………….. 537 17.8 Software numbers……………………..538 Application……………………….. 538 17.9 Entering the code number……………………. 538 Application……………………….. 538 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 45
  17.10 Setting up data interfaces……………………539 Serial interfaces on the TNC 620………………….539 Application……………………….. 539 Setting the RS-232 interface…………………….539 Setting the BAUD RATE (baudRate)………………… 539 Setting the protocol (protocol)………………….540 Setting data bits (dataBits)……………………540 Check parity (parity)……………………..540 Setting the stop bits (stopBits)………………….540 Setting handshaking (flowControl)………………….
• Page 46
  Ethernet interface RJ45 socket………………….571 18.3 Technical Information……………………..572 18.4 Overview tables………………………580 Fixed cycles……………………….580 Miscellaneous functions……………………581 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared…………..583 Comparison: Specifications……………………583 Comparison: Data interfaces…………………….583 Comparison: Accessories……………………584 Comparison: PC software……………………584 Comparison: Machine-specific functions………………..

• Page 47: First Steps With The Tnc 620

  First Steps with the TNC 620…

• Page 48: Overview

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Overview Overview This chapter is intended to help TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures. For more information on a respective topic, see the section referred to in the text. The following topics are included in this chapter:…

• Page 49: Programming The First Part

  Further information on this topic Writing and editing programs: See «Editing a program», page 98 Overview of keys: See «Controls of the TNC», page 2 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 50: Creating A New Program/File Management

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Programming the first part Creating a new program/file management Press the PGM MGT key: The TNC opens the file management. The file management of the TNC is arranged much like the file management on a PC with the Windows Explorer.

• Page 51: Defining A Workpiece Blank

  1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 3 END PGM NEW MM Further information on this topic Define the blank: page 94 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 52: Program Layout

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Programming the first part Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This makes it easier to find your place, accelerates programming and reduces errors. Recommended program layout for simple, conventional contour…

• Page 53: Programming A Simple Contour

  M13 and confirm with the END key: The TNC stores the entered positioning block To return to the contour, Press the APPR/DEP key. The TNC displays a soft-key row with approach and departure functions. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 54
  First Steps with the TNC 620 Programming the first part Select the approach function APPR CT: Enter the coordinate of the contour starting point in X and Y, e.g. 5/5. Confirm with the ENT key Center angle? Enter the approach angle, e.g. 90°, and confirm with the ENT key Circle radius? Enter the approach radius, e.g.
• Page 55
  Programmable feed rates: See «Possible feed rate input», page 96 Tool radius compensation: See «Tool radius compensation «, page 182 Miscellaneous functions (M): See «M functions for program run inspection, spindle and coolant «, page 343 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 56: Creating A Cycle Program

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Programming the first part Creating a cycle program The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece blank.

• Page 57
  9 END PGM C200 MM Further information on this topic Creating a new program: See «Opening programs and entering», page 91 Cycle programming: See User’s Manual for Cycles, «Cycle fundamentals / Overviews» TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 58: Graphically Testing The First Part (Advanced Graphic Features Software Option)

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Graphically testing the first part (Advanced Graphic Features software option) Graphically testing the first part (Advanced Graphic Features software option) Selecting the correct operating mode You can test programs only in the Test Run mode:…

• Page 59: Choosing The Program You Want To Test

  Projection in three planes 3-D view Further information on this topic Graphic functions: See «Graphics (Advanced Graphic Features software option)», page 502 Running a test run: See «Test Run», page 513 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 60: Starting The Test Run

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Graphically testing the first part (Advanced Graphic Features software option) Starting the test run Press the RESET + START soft key: The TNC simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end…

• Page 61: Setting Up Tools

  When measuring on the machine: store the tools in the tool changer page 63 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 62: The Tool Table Tool.t

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Setting up tools The tool table TOOL.T In the tool table TOOL.T (permanently saved under TNC:TABLE), save the tool data such as length and radius, but also further tool- specific information that the TNC needs to perform its functions.

• Page 63: The Pocket Table Tool_P .Tch

  Exit the pocket table: press the END key. Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC: See «Modes of Operation», page 71 Working with the pocket table: See «Pocket table for tool changer», page 171 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 64: Workpiece Setup

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Workpiece setup Workpiece setup Selecting the correct operating mode Workpieces are set up in the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode Press the operating-mode key: The TNC switches to the Manual mode of operation Further information on this topic Manual Operation mode: See «Moving the machine axes»,…

• Page 65: Datum Setting With 3-D Touch Probe (Software Option: Touch Probe Function)

  Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Datum setting: See «Datum Setting with 3-D Touch Probe (Touch Probe Function Software Option)», page 479 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 66: Running The First Program

  First Steps with the TNC 620 Running the first program Running the first program Selecting the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence mode: Press the operating-mode key: The TNC goes into the Program Run, Single Block mode and the TNC executes the program block by block.

• Page 67: Introduction

  Introduction…

• Page 68: The Tnc 620

  Compatibility Machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls (starting from the TNC 150 B) may not always run on the TNC 620 . If NC blocks contain invalid elements, the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks when the file is opened.

• Page 69: Visual Display Unit And Operating Panel

  Setting the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Soft-key selection keys for machine tool builders Switching the soft-key rows for machine tool builders USB connection TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 70: Setting The Screen Layout

  62 Select the desired screen layout Control Panel The TNC 620 is delivered with an integrated keyboard. As an alternative, the TNC 620 is also available with a separate display unit and an operating panel with alphabetic keyboard.

• Page 71: Modes Of Operation

  If desired, you can have the programming graphics show the programmed paths of traverse. Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Window Soft key Program Left: program, right: program structure Left: program, right: programming graphics TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 72: Test Run

  Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables (Software option Pallet management) Window Soft key Pallet table Left: program, right: pallet table Left: pallet table, right: status TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 73: Status Displays

  Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane The M128 function or TCPM FUNCTION is active No active program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 74: Additional Status Displays

  Please note that some of the status information described below is not available unless the associated software option is enabled on your TNC. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 75
  Circle center CC (pole) Dwell time counter Machining time when the program was completely simulated in the Test Run operating mode Current machining time in percent Current time Active programs TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 76
  Information on standard cycles (CYC tab) Soft key Meaning No direct Active machining cycle selection possible Active values of Cycle 32 Tolerance TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 77
  Positions and coordinates (POS tab) Soft key Meaning Type of position display, e.g. actual position Tilt angle of the working plane Angle of a basic rotation Active kinematics TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 78
  (DYN = dynamic measurement) Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value. If the measured value is followed by an asterisk, the permissible tolerance in the tool table was exceeded TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 79
  For further information, refer to the User’s Manual for Cycles, «Coordinate Transformation Cycles.» Displaying Q parameters (QPARA tab) Soft key Meaning Display the current values of the defined Q parameters Display the character strings of the defined string parameters TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 80: Window Manager

  In this case, switch to the window manager and correct the problem. If required, refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 81: Task Bar

  TNC (switch for example to the viewer or TNCguide) Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can get information, make settings or start applications. The following functions are available: About Xfce: Information on the Windows manager Xfce About HEROS: Information about the operating system of the NC Control: Start and stop the TNC software.

• Page 82: Selinux Security Software

  There are only two processes that are permitted to execute new files: Starting a software update: A software update from HEIDENHAIN can replace or change system files. Starting the SELinux configuration: The configuration of SELinux is usually password-protected by your machine tool builder.

• Page 83: Accessories: Heidenhain 3-D Touch Probes And Electronic Handwheels

  Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3-D touch probes (Touch Probe Function software option) The various HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probes enable you to: Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Measure and inspect tools…

• Page 84: Hr Electronic Handwheels

  Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand. A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available. Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 panel-mounted handwheels, HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel. TNC 620 | User’s Manual…

• Page 85: Programming: Fundamentals, File Management

  Programming: Fundamentals, file management…

• Page 86: Fundamentals

  Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position (reference point) you define within the coordinate system. Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental coordinate values. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 87: Reference System On Milling Machines

  X direction, and the index finger in the positive Y direction. The TNC 620 can control up to 5 axes. The axes U, V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X, Y and Z, respectively.

• Page 88: Polar Coordinates

  The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA. Coordinates of the pole Reference axis of the angle (plane) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 89: Absolute And Incremental Workpiece Positions

  Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the angle reference axis. Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 90: Selecting The Datum

  The fastest, easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3-D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN. See “Setting the Datum with a 3-D Touch Probe” in the Cycle Programming User’s Manual.

• Page 91: Opening Programs And Entering

  Opening programs and entering Opening programs and entering Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN Conversational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks. The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block. The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence.

• Page 92: Define The Blank: Blk Form

  1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 93
  7 L X+70 8 L Z-100 9 L X+0 10 L Z+1 End of contour 11 LBL 0 End of subprogram 12 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 94: Opening A New Part Program

  The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks. If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog at Working plane in graphic: XY by pressing the DEL key. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 95: Programming Tool Movements In Conversational

  Enter 3 (miscellaneous function M3 «Spindle ON»). With the END key, the TNC ends this dialog. The program-block window displays the following line: 3 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 96
  The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT. column Functions for conversational guidance Ignore the dialog question End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 97: Actual Position Capture

  (e.g. for radius compensation), then the TNC also closes the soft-key row for axis selection. The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 98: Editing A Program

  ENT key. Or: Enter the block number step and press the N LINES soft key to jump over the entered number of lines upward or downward TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 99
  If you have started a search in a very long program, the TNC shows a progress display window. You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 100
  To insert the block, press the INSERT BLOCK soft key To end the marking function, press the Cancel selection soft TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 101: The Tnc Search Function

  Repeat the search process: The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for End the search function TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 102
  Replace soft key. To replace all instances: Press the REPLACE ALL soft key. To not replace the text and jump to the next instance: Press the FIND soft key End the search function TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 103: File Manager: Fundamentals

  With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 2 GB. Depending on the setting, the TNC generates a backup file (*.bak) after editing and saving of NC programs. This can reduce the memory space available to you. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 104
  You should not use any other characters in file names in order to prevent any file transfer problems. The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 82 characters, See «Paths», page 106. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 105: Displaying Externally Generated Files On The Tnc

  Data Backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals. The TNCremoNT data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC. You additionally need a data medium on which all machine- specific data, such as the PLC program, machine parameters, etc., are stored.

• Page 106: Working With The File Manager

  PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the following path: TNC:AUFTR1NCPROGPROG1.H The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 107: Overview: Functions Of The File Manager

  Select the editor Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Display all the directories of a particular drive Rename a directory Create a new directory TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 108: Calling The File Manager

  File is protected against erasing and editing File is protected against erasing and editing, because it is being run Date Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 109: Selecting Drives, Directories And Files

  Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window Press the SELECT soft key, or Press the ENT key The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you called the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 110: Creating A New Directory

  TNC copies the file to the selected directory. The original file is retained. When the copying process has been started with ENT or the OK soft key, the TNC displays a pop-up window with a progress indicator. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 111: Copying Files Into Another Directory

  Press the CANCEL soft key if no file is to be overwritten If you wish to overwrite a protected file, you need to select the «Protected files» check box or cancel the copying process. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 112: Copying A Table

  Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key: The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to the selected target directory TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 113: Choosing One Of The Last Files Selected

  Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select: Moves the highlight up and down within a window To select a file: Press the OK soft key, or… Press the ENT key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 114: Deleting A File

  DELETE soft key. The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files To confirm deletion: Press the OK soft key, or… To interrupt deletion: Press the CANCEL soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 115: Tagging Files

  To copy tagged files: Press the COPY TAG soft key, or … To delete tagged files: Press END to end the marking function, and then DELETE to delete the tagged files. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 116: Renaming A File

  To rename: Press the OK soft key or the ENT key Sorting files Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files Select the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 117: Additional Functions

  Search for a USB device In order to remove the USB device, move the highlight to the USB device Remove the USB device More information: See «USB devices on the TNC», page 126. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 118: Additional Tools For Management Of External File Types

  PDF viewer To exit the viewer, proceed as follows: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select the menu item Close: The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 119
  Help. To exit Mozilla Firefox, proceed as follows: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 120
  To exit Xarchiver, proceed as follows: Use the mouse to select the Archive menu item Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 121
  (CTRL+C, CTRL+V,…), are available within Mousepad. To exit Mousepad, proceed as follows: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 122
  Help. To exit ristretto, proceed as follows: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select the menu item Quit: The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 123: Data Transfer To/From An External Data Medium

  Use the arrow keys to highlight the file(s) that you want to transfer: Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight from the right to the left window, and vice versa TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 124
  To select another directory in the split-screen display, press the SHOW TREE soft key. If you press the SHOW FILES soft key, the TNC shows the content of the selected directory! TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 125: The Tnc In A Network

  Auto column if the connection is established automatically Set up new network connection Delete existing network connection Remove Copy network connection Copy Edit network connection Machining Clear status window Clear TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 126: Usb Devices On The Tnc

  The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree, so you can use the file-management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly. Your machine tool builder can assign permanent names for USB devices. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 127
  Exit the file manager In order to re-establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed, press the following soft key: Select the function for reconnection of USB devices TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 129: Programming: Programming Aids

  Programming: Programming aids…

• Page 130: Screen Keyboard

  Screen keyboard Screen keyboard If you are using the compact version (without an alphabetic keyboard) TNC 620, you can enter letters and special characters with the screen keyboard or with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port. Enter the text with the screen keyboard…

• Page 131: Adding Comments

  Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key (;) on the alphabetic keyboard Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 132: Functions For Editing Of The Comment

  Jump to the beginning of a word. Words must be separated by a space Jump to the end of a word. Words must be separated by a space Switch between insert mode and overwrite mode TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 133: Display Of Nc Programs

  You can move the screen content with the mouse via the scrollbar on the right edge of the program window. In addition, the size and position of the scrollbar indicates program length and cursor position. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 134: Structuring Programs

  If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block, the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can quickly skip large program sections. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 135: Calculator

  Add value to buffer memory Save the value to buffer memory Recall from buffer memory Delete buffer memory contents Natural logarithm Logarithm Exponential function Check the algebraic sign Form the absolute value TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 136
  The calculator remains in effect even after a change in operating modes. Press the END soft key to close the calculator. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 137
  Position the calculator in the center You can also shift the calculator with the arrow keys on your keyboard. If you have connected a mouse you can also position the calculator with this. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 138: Cutting Data Calculator

  Window or spindle speed calculation: Code letter Meaning Tool radius (mm) Cutting speed (m/min) Result for spindle speed (rev/ min) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 139
  Load the feed per tooth from the opened dialog form into the cutting data calculator form Load the value from an opened dialog form into the cutting data calculator form Switch to the pocket calculator TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 140
  Move the cutting data calculator in the direction of the arrow Position the cutting data calculator in the center Use inch values in the cutting data calculator Close the cutting data calculator TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 141: Programming Graphics

  Generate programming graphic blockwise Generate a complete graphic or complete it after RESET + START Stop the programming graphics. This soft key only appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 142: Block Number Display On/Off

  Shift the soft-key row: See picture To erase the graphic: Press the CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key. Showing grid lines Shift the soft-key row: See picture Show grid lines: Press the «Show grid lines» soft TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 143: Magnification Or Reduction Of Details

  If you have connected a mouse you can draw a frame overlay with the left mouse button for the area to be magnified. You can also use the mouse to magnify or shrink the graphics. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 144: Error Messages

  Press the ERR key. The TNC opens the error window and displays all accumulated error messages. Closing the error window Press the END soft key—or Press the ERR key. The TNC closes the error window. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 145: Detailed Error Messages

  Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL INFO soft key. The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error To exit Details, press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 146: Clearing Errors

  If you need the current log file: Press the Current File soft key. The oldest entry is at the beginning of the error log file, and the most recent entry is at the end. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 147: Keystroke Log

  The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log. The oldest entry is at the beginning, and the most recent entry is at the end of the file. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 148: Informational Texts

  Press the Save service files soft key: The TNC opens a pop-up window in which you can enter a name for the service file. Saving service files: Press the OK soft key. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 149: Calling The Tncguide Help System

  There you will find further, more detailed information on the error message concerned. Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages, if available TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 150: Tncguide Context-Sensitive Help System

  TNCguide context-sensitive help system TNCguide context-sensitive help system Application Before you can use the TNCguide, you need to download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home page (See «Downloading current help files», page 155). TNCguide context-sensitive help system includes the user documentation in HTML format.

• Page 151: Working With The Tncguide

  TNC starts the internally defined standard browser (usually the Internet Explorer), or otherwise a browser adapted by HEIDENHAIN. For many soft keys there is a context-sensitive call through which you can go directly to the description of the soft key’s function.

• Page 152
  If the text window at right is active: Jump to next link Select the page last shown Page forward if you have used the «select page last shown» function Move up by one page Move down by one page TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 153
  Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword Use the ENT key to call the information on the selected keyword You can enter the search word only with a keyboard connected via USB. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 154
  If you activate the Search only in titles function (by mouse or by using the cursor and the space key), the TNC searches only through headings and ignores the body text. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 155: Downloading Current Help Files

  TNCguide context-sensitive help system Downloading current help files You’ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN homepage under: www.heidenhain.de Documentation and information User Documentation TNCguide Select the desired language TNC Controls Series, e.g. TNC 600 Desired NC software number, e.g. TNC 620 (81760x-01)

• Page 156
  Finnish TNC:tncguidefi Dutch TNC:tncguidenl Polish TNC:tncguidepl Hungarian TNC:tncguidehu Russian TNC:tncguideru TNC:tncguidezh Chinese (simplified) TNC:tncguidezh-tw Chinese (traditional) Slovenian (software option) TNC:tncguidesl Norwegian TNC:tncguideno Slovak TNC:tncguidesk Korean TNC:tncguidekr Turkish TNC:tncguidetr Romanian TNC:tncguidero TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 157: Programming: Tools

  Programming: Tools…

• Page 158: Entering Tool-Related Data

  Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed-rate override knob F . TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 159: Spindle Speed S

  END, or switch via the VC soft key to entry of the cutting speed Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob S. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 160: Tool Data

  The entire tool length is essential for the TNC in order to perform numerous functions involving multi-axis machining. Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 161: Delta Values For Lengths And Radii

  In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key. Example 4 TOOL DEF 5 L+10 R+5 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 162: Enter Tool Data Into The Table

  You can select either list view or form view for tables via the «Screen layout» key. When you open the tool table you can also change its layout. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 163
  Current age of the tool in minutes: The TNC Current tool age? automatically counts the current tool life (CUR_TIME: for CURrent TIME. A starting value can be entered for used tools TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 164
  Max. 16 characters, format specified internally: Date = yyyy.mm.dd, time = hh.mm ACC status Activate or deactivate active chatter control for the respective tool (page 365). 1=active/0=inactive range: 0 (inactive) and 1 (active) Input TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 165
  Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage Breakage tolerance: radius? detection. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 166
  Cancel filter: Press the previously selected tool type again or select another tool type The machine tool builder adapts the features of the filter function to the requirements of your machine. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 167
  With the Fix number of columns function, you can define how many columns (0 -3) are fixed to the left screen edge. These columns are also displayed if you navigate in the table to the right. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 168
  If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page, the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the symbol «>>» or «<<«. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 169
  Show all drills in the tool table Show all cutters in the tool table Show all taps/thread cutters in the tool table Show all touch probes in the tool table TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 170: Importing Tool Tables

  If you export a tool table from an iTNC 530 and import it into a TNC 620, you have to adapt its format and content before you can use the tool table. On the TNC 620, you can adapt the tool table conveniently with the IMPORT TABLE function. The TNC converts the contents of the imported tool table to a format valid for the TNC 620 and saves the changes to the selected file.

• Page 171: Pocket Table For Tool Changer

  Select the pocket table: Press the POCKET TABLE soft key Set the EDIT soft key to ON. On your machine this might not be necessary or even possible. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 172
  Lock the pocket below? LOCKED_LEFT Lock the pocket at Box magazine: Lock the pocket at left left? LOCKED_RIGHT Box magazine: Lock the pocket at right Lock the pocket at right? TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 173
  Edit the current field Sort the view The machine manufacturer defines the features, properties and designations of the various display filters. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 174: Call Tool Data

  To do so, press the SEARCH soft key and enter the tool number or tool name. With the OK soft key you can load the tool into the dialog box. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 175
  If you are working with tool tables, use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool. Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or type the tool name in quotation marks. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 176: Tool Change

  When the specified tool life has expired, the TNC can automatically insert a replacement tool and continue machining with it. Activate the miscellaneous function M101 for this. M101 is reset with M102. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 177
  100. If you want to reset the current age of a tool (e.g. after changing the indexable inserts), enter the value 0 in the CUR_TIME column. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 178
  TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the M function M107, and reactivate it with M108.See also: «Three- dimensional tool compensation (software option 2)», page 423. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 179: Tool Usage Test

  TOOL.T Tool number (–1: No tool inserted yet) Tool index NAME Tool name from the tool table TIME Tool-usage time in seconds (feed time) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 180
  The highlight in the pallet file is on a pallet entry: The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 181: Tool Compensation

  Tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table :Oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL 0 block TOOL CALL Oversize for length DL in the tool table TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 182: Tool Radius Compensation

  Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation: R0 The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates. Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 183
  To select tool movement to the right of the programmed contour, press the RR soft key, or Select tool movement without radius compensation or cancel radius compensation: Press the ENT key To conclude the block, press END. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 184
  Danger of collision! To prevent the tool from damaging the contour, be careful not to program the starting or end position for machining inside corners at a corner of the contour. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 185: Programming: Programming Contours

  Programming: Programming contours…

• Page 186: Tool Movements

  With the TNC’s miscellaneous functions you can affect the program run, e.g., a program interruption the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off the path behavior of the tool TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 187: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  In addition, parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3-D touch probe during program run. Programming with Q parameters is described in Chapter 8. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 188: Fundamentals Of Path Functions

  The program block contains two coordinates. The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane. Example L X+70 Y+50 The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X=70, Y=50 (see figure). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 189
  Direction of rotation DR for circular movements When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element, enter the direction of rotation as follows: Clockwise direction of rotation: DR- Counterclockwise direction of rotation: DR+ TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 190
  Creating the program blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the plain-language dialog. The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 191
  MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M ? Enter 3 (miscellaneous function e.g. M3), and terminate the dialog with END. The part program now contains the following line: L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX M3 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 192: Approaching And Departing A Contour

  The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour. You program helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 193: Important Positions For Approach And Departure

  TNC moves to the auxiliary point P the feed rate programmed with the APPR block. If no feed rate is programmed before the approach block, the TNC generates an error message. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 194
  APPR/DEP LN and APPR/DEP CT functions. In addition, you must program both coordinates in the working plane in the first traverse block after APPR. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 195: Approaching On A Straight Line With Tangential Connection: Appr Lt

  8 APPR LN X+10 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 196: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Appr Ct

  8 APPR CT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 CCA180 R+10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, radius R=10 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 197: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection From A Straight Line To The Contour: Appr Lct

  Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LT LEN12.5 F100 Depart contour by LEN=12.5 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 198: Departing In A Straight Line Perpendicular To The Last Contour Point: Dep Ln

  Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LN LEN+20 F100 Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN=20 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 199: Departing On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Dep Ct

  Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LCT X+10 Y+12 R+8 F100 Coordinates PN, arc radius=8 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 200: Path Contours — Cartesian Coordinates

  Straight line or See «Path contours programming circular path with any – FK free contour connection to the programming preceding contour (Advanced element Programming Features software option)», page 219 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 201: Straight Line L

  Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the actual-position-capture key. The TNC generates an L block with the actual position coordinates. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 202: Inserting A Chamfer Between Two Straight Lines

  The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour. A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block. After the CHF block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 203: Corner Rounding Rnd

  A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that RND block. After the RND block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 204: Circle Center Cc

  The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center: The tool does not move to this position. The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 205: Circular Path C Around Circle Center Cc

  The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle. Input tolerance: up to 0.016 mm (selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter). Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse: 0.0016 µm. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 206: Circlecr With Defined Radius

  The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc. The maximum radius is 99.9999 m. You can also enter rotary axes A, B and C. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 207
  11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR- (ARC 1) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR+ (ARC 2) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR- (ARC 3) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR+ (ARC 4) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 208: Circle Ct With Tangential Connection

  10 L Y+0 A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc! TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 209: Example: Linear Movements And Chamfers With Cartesian Coordinates

  14 DEP LT LEN10 F1000 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection 15 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 16 END PGM LINEAR MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 210: Example: Circular Movements With Cartesian Coordinates

  16 DEP LCT X-20 Y-20 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM CIRCULAR MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 211: Example: Full Circle With Cartesian Coordinates

  10 DEP LCT X-40 Y+50 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM C-CC MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 212: Path Contours – Polar Coordinates

  Helical Combination of a Polar radius, polar angle interpolation circular and a linear of the arc end point, movement coordinate of the end point in the tool axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 213: Zero Point For Polar Coordinates: Pole Cc

  If the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise: PA<0 Example NC blocks 12 CC X+45 Y+25 13 LP PR+30 PA+0 RR F300 M3 14 LP PA+60 15 LP IPA+60 16 LP PA+180 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 214: Circular Path Cp Around Pole Cc

  Example NC blocks 12 CC X+40 Y+35 13 L X+0 Y+35 RL F250 M3 14 LP PR+25 PA+120 15 CTP PR+30 PA+30 16 L Y+0 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 215: Helix

  Internal thread Work direction Direction of rotation Radius compensation Right-hand Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– DR– Left-hand Z– External thread Right-hand Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– DR– Left-hand Z– TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 216
  Example NC blocks: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 12 CC X+40 Y+25 13 L Z+0 F100 M3 14 LP PR+3 PA+270 RL F50 15 CP IPA-1800 IZ+5 DR- TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 217: Example: Linear Movement With Polar Coordinates

  15 DEP PLCT PR+60 PA+180 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 17 END PGM LINEARPO MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 218: Example: Helix

  10 DEP CT CCA180 R+2 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM HELIX MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 219: Path Contours – Fk Free Contour Programming (Advanced Programming Features Software Option)

  The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 220
  NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach. Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL command. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 221: Fk Programming Graphics

  (2nd soft-key row) if you cannot distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting If the displayed contour element matches the drawing, select the contour element with FSELECT. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 222
  CALL are displayed in another color. Showing block numbers in the graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR. soft key to SHOW (soft-key row 3) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 223: Initiating The Fk Dialog

  Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys The pole for FK programming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 224: Free Straight Line Programming

  To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key. To initiate the dialog, Press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 225: Free Circular Path Programming

  To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key. To initiate the dialog, Press the FCT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 226: Input Options

  TNCs are not compatible. Example NC blocks 27 FLT X+25 LEN 12.5 AN+35 RL F200 28 FC DR+ R6 LEN 10 AN-45 29 FCT DR- R15 LEN 15 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 227
  Rotational direction of the arc Radius of an arc Example NC blocks 10 FC CCX+20 CCY+15 DR+ R15 11 FPOL X+20 Y+15 12 FL AN+40 13 FC DR+ R15 CCPR+35 CCPA+40 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 228
  Beginning of CLSD+ contour: End of contour: CLSD– Example NC blocks 12 L X+5 Y+35 RL F500 M3 13 FC DR- R15 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+35 17 FCT DR- R+15 CLSD- TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 229: Auxiliary Points

  X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc Distance of auxiliary point to circular arc Example NC blocks 13 FC DR- R10 P1X+42.929 P1Y+60.071 14 FLT AN-70 PDX+50 PDY+53 D10 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 230: Relative Data

  Polar coordinates relative to block N Example NC blocks 12 FPOL X+10 Y+10 13 FL PR+20 PA+20 14 FL AN+45 15 FCT IX+20 DR- R20 CCA+90 RX 13 16 FL IPR+35 PA+0 RPR 13 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 231
  Example NC blocks 12 FL X+10 Y+10 RL 13 FL … 14 FL X+18 Y+35 15 FL … 16 FL … 17 FC DR- R10 CCA+0 ICCX+20 ICCY-15 RCCX12 RCCY14 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 232: Example: Fk Programming 1

  Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L X-30 Y+0 R0 FMAX 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM FK1 MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 233: Example: Fk Programming 2

  19 DEP LCT X+30 Y+30 R5 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM FK2 MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 234: Example: Fk Programming 3

  26 FCT DR- R65 27 FSELECT 1 28 FCT Y+0 DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0 29 FSELECT 4 30 DEP CT CCA90 R+5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 235
  Path contours – FK free contour programming (Advanced Programming Features software option) 31 L X-70 R0 FMAX 32 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 33 END PGM FK3 MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 237: Programming: Data Transfer From Dxf Files Or Plain-Language Contours

  Programming: Data transfer from DXF files or plain- language contours…

• Page 238: Processing Dxf Files (Software Option)

  ASCII format. The following DXF elements can be selected as contours: LINE (straight line) CIRCLE (complete circle) ARC (circular arc) POLYLINE TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 239: Opening A Dxf File

  DXF converter as desired. This is especially useful if you want to insert contours or machining positions in a plain-language program by copying through the clipboard. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 240: Basic Settings

  The resolution specifies how many decimal places the TNC should use when generating the contour program. Default setting: 4 decimal places (equivalent to resolution of 0.1 µm when the unit of measure MM is active). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 241
  In addition, you must remove the comments that the DXF converter inserts into the contour program. The TNC displays the active basic settings in the footer of the screen. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 242: Setting Layers

  To show a layer, select the layer with the left mouse button, and click its check box again to show it TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 243: Defining The Datum

  You can also change the reference point once you have already selected the contour. The TNC does not calculate the actual contour data until you save the selected contour in a contour program. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 244
  If the TNC calculates multiple intersections, it selects the intersection nearest the mouse-click on the second element. If the TNC cannot calculate an intersection, it rescinds the marking of the first element. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 245: Selecting And Saving A Contour

  Select the first contour element such that approach without collision is possible. If the contour elements are very close to one another, use the zoom function. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 246
  ID number in the left window. The first number is the serial contour element number, the second element is the element number of the respective polyline from the DXF file. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 247
  If you want to add a bookmark or select one, click the path information next to the symbol in the saving dialog box . The TNC opens a menu in which you can manage the bookmarks. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 248
  TNC extends/shortens the contour element along the same arc. In order to use this function, at least two contour elements must already be selected, so that the direction is clearly determined. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 249: Selecting And Saving Machining Positions

  Quick selection of hole positions by entering a diameter: By entering a hole diameter, you can select all hole positions with that diameter in the DXF file («Rapid selection of hole positions by entering a diameter»). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 250
  If you want to select more machining positions in order to save them to a different file, press the Cancel selected elements icon and select as described above TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 251
  If you want to select more machining positions in order to save them to a different file, press the Cancel selected elements icon and select as described above TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 252
  If you want to select more machining positions in order to save them to a different file, press the Cancel selected elements icon and select as described above TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 253
  TNC sorts the selected machining positions for the most efficient possible tool path. You can have the tool paths displayed by clicking the «Show tool path» icon, See «Basic settings», page 240. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 254
  To deselect two or more selected positions, press and hold the Ctrl key and open an box with the left mouse key To deselect individual positions, press and hold the Ctrl key and click them individually TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 255: Programming: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  Programming: Subprograms and program section repeats…

• Page 256: Labeling Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  Do not use a label number or label name more than once! Label 0 (LBL 0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 257: Subprograms

  To mark the end, press the LBL SET key and enter the label number «0» TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 258: Calling A Subprogram

  NO ENT key. Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats. CALL LBL 0 is not permitted (Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 259: Program-Section Repeats

  LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat. If you want to use a label name, press the lbl name soft key to switch to text entry Enter the program section TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 260: Calling A Program Section Repeat

  Press the QS soft key; the TNC will then jump to the label name that is specified in the string parameter defined Repeat REP: Enter the number of repeats, then confirm with the ENT key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 261: Any Desired Program As Subprogram

  FN 9: IF +0 EQU +0 GOTO LBL 99 jump function to force a jump over this program section The called program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling program, otherwise an infinite loop will result TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 262: Calling Any Program As A Subprogram

  Danger of collision! Coordinate transformations that you define in the called program remain in effect for the calling program too, unless you reset them. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 263: Nesting

  Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 19 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls: 19, where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 264: Subprogram Within A Subprogram

  45. End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS. 5 Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 265: Repeating Program Section Repeats

  4 Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once (including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27). 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 (end of program). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 266: Repeating A Subprogram

  3 Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice. This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice. 4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19. End of program. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 267: Programming Examples

  19 CALL LBL 1 REP 4 Return jump to LBL 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM PGMWDH MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 268: Example: Groups Of Holes

  Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 17 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 18 LBL 0 End of subprogram 1 19 END PGM UP1 MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 269: Example: Group Of Holes With Several Tools

  New plunging depth for drilling 11 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern 12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M6 Tool change 13 TOOL CALL 3 Z S500 Call tool: reamer TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 270
  Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 29 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 30 LBL 0 End of subprogram 2 31 END PGM UP2 MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 271: Programming: Q Parameters

  Programming: Q Parameters…

• Page 272: Principle And Overview Of Functions

  TNC memory Q1500 to Q1599 Parameters that are primarily used for Def-active OEM cycles, globally effective for all programs that are stored in the TNC memory TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 273: Programming Notes

  (round-off error). Keep this in mind especially when you use calculated Q-parameter contents for jump commands or positioning movements. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 274: Calling Q Parameter Functions

  If you have a USB keyboard connected, you can press the Q key to open the dialog for entering a formula. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 275: Part Families-Q Parameters In Place Of Numerical Values

  Example: Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius: R = Q1 Cylinder height: H = Q2 Cylinder Z1: Q1 = +30 Q2 = +10 Cylinder Z2: Q1 = +10 Q2 = +50 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 276: Describing Contours With Mathematical Functions

  To the right of the «=» character you can enter the following: Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 277: Programming Fundamental Operations

  FIRST VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter Q5 as the first value and confirm with the ENT key. SECOND VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter 7 as the second value and confirm with the ENT key. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 278: Angle Functions (Trigonometry)

  FN 13: Q20 = +25 ANG-Q1 Form and assign an angle with arctan from two sides or with sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle < 360°) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 279: Calculation Of Circles

  (Y if spindle axis is Z) in parameter Q21, and the circle radius in parameter Q22. Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 280: If-Then Decisions With Q Parameters

  FN 12: IF SMALLER, JUMP e.g. FN 12: IF+Q5 LT+0 GOTO LBL “ANYNAME“ If the first value or parameter is smaller than the second value or parameter, jump to specified label TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 281: Abbreviations Used

  If-then decisions with Q parameters Abbreviations used: Equal to Not equal Greater than Less than Go to GOTO UNDEFINED Parameter not defined DEFINED Parameter defined TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 282: Checking And Changing Q Parameters

  If you want to check or edit local, global or string parameters, press the SHOW PARAMETERS q QL QR qs soft key. The TNC then displays the specific parameter type. The functions previously described also apply. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 283
  Q parameters or string parameters. Multiple Q parameters are entered separated by commas (e.g. Q 1,2,3,4). To define display ranges, enter a hyphen (e.g. Q 10-14). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 284: Additional Functions

  Export local Q parameters or QS parameters into a calling program FN 26:TABOPEN Opening a freely definable table FN 27:TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table FN 28:TABREAD Read from a freely definable table TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 285: Fn 14: Error: Displaying Error Messages

  With the FN 14: ERROR function, you can call messages under program control. The messages are predefined by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN. If the TNC encounters a block with FN 14 during program run or test run, it will interrupt the run and display an error message.

• Page 286
  1059 TCHPROBE 425: length below min 1060 TCHPROBE 426: length exceeds max 1061 TCHPROBE 426: length below min 1062 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too large 1063 TCHPROBE 430: diameter too small TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 287
  Function not permitted 1098 Contradictory workpc. blank dim. 1099 Measuring position not allowed 1100 Kinematic access not possible 1101 Meas. pos. not in traverse range 1102 Preset compensation not possible TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 288
  Plunging type is not possible 1105 Plunge angle incorrectly defined 1106 Angular length is undefined 1107 Slot width is too large 1108 Scaling factors not equal 1109 Tool data inconsistent TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 289: Fn 16: F-Print: Output Of Formatted Texts And Q Parameter Values

  (incl. decimal point), of which 3 are after the decimal, Long, Floating (decimal number) Format for text variable Format for integer Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character Line break TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 290
  Outputs text only for Portuguese conversational language L_HUNGARIA Outputs text only for Hungarian conversational language L_SLOVENIAN Outputs text only for Slovenian conversational language L_ALL Outputs text independently of the conversational language TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 291
  NC program with the FN 16 function is located. You can define a standard path for outputting protocol files via the user parameters fn16DefaultPath and fn16DefaultPathSim (Program Test). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 292
  If you output the same file more than once in the program, the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already output within the target file. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 293: Fn 18: Sys-Datum Read: Reading System Data

  1=M4 active, 2=M5 after M3, 3=M5 after M4 Gear range Coolant status: 0=off, 1=on Active feed rate Index of prepared tool Index of active tool Channel data, 25 Channel number TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 294
  Oversize for tool length DL Tool no. Tool radius oversize DR Tool no. Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool no. Tool locked (0 or 1) Tool no. Number of the replacement tool TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 295
  Pocket table data, 51 Pocket number Tool number Pocket number Special tool: 0=No, 1=Yes Pocket number Fixed pocket: 0=No, 1=Yes Pocket number Locked pocket: 0=No, 1=Yes Pocket number PLC status TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 296
  3 = with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL 1 = without Rounding radius R2 oversize 2 = with oversize 3 = with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 297
  Tilted working plane active / inactive (–1/0) in a Manual operating mode Active datum shift, 220 X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 298
  U axis V axis W axis Current position in the X axis active coordinate system, Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 299
  Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate for stationary spindle Measuring feed rate for rotating spindle Maximum measuring range Safety clearance for linear measurement Safety clearance for radial measurement Spindle speed Probing direction TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 300
  Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool locked TL 0 = not locked, 1 = locked Number of the replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR. TIME TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 301
  1 = execution , 2 = simulation Example: Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25. 55 FN 18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NR4 IDX3 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 302: Fn 19: Plc: Transfer Values To Plc

  32 to 62 (first PL 401 B) 64 to 94 (second PL 401 B) Counter 48 to 79 Timer 0 to 95 Byte 0 to 4095 Word 0 to 2047 Double 2048 to 4095 word TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 303
  Additional functions The TNC 620 uses an extended interface for communication between the PLC and NC. This is a new, symbolic Application Programmer Interface (API). The familiar previous PLC-NC interface is also available and can be used if desired. The machine tool builder decides whether the new or old TNC API is used.

• Page 304: Fn 29: Plc: Transfer Values To The Plc

  Example: The local Q parameter Q25 is exported 56 FN37: EXPORT Q25 Example: The local Q parameters Q25 to Q30 are exported 56 FN37: EXPORT Q25 — Q30 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 305: Accessing Tables With Sql Commands

  Result set Synonym: This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name. Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 306: A Transaction

  You must conclude a transaction, even if it consists solely of read accesses. Only this guarantees that changes/insertions are not lost, that locks are canceled, and that result sets are released. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 307
  Columns that are not bound to Q parameters are not included in the read-/write-processes. If a new table row is generated with SQL INSERT…, the columns not bound to Q parameters are filled with default values. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 308: Programming Sql Commands

  If INDEX is programmed: The indexed row remains in the result set. All other rows are deleted from the result set. The transaction is concluded. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 309: Sql Bind

  The synonym is entered directly, whereas the path and file name are entered in single quotation marks Column designation: Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 310: Sql Select

  (see examples of the SQL command); names of the table columns to be transferred—separate several columns by a comma (see examples). Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 311
  Not equal to != <> Less than < Less than or equal to <= Greater than > Greater than or equal to >= Linking multiple conditions: Logical AND Logical OR TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 312: Sql Fetch

  30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX (n=0). Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index Row number is programmed directly . . . 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX5 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 313: Sql Update

  Database: SQL access ID: Q parameter with the . . . for identifying the result set (also see SQL handle SELECT). 20SQL Q5 «SELECT MEAS_NO,MEAS_X,MEAS_Y, MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE» . . . 40 SQL INSERTQ1 HANDLE Q5 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 314: Sql Commit

  50 SQL ROLLBACKQ1 HANDLE Q5 Database: Index to SQL result: Line that is to remain in the result set. Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 315: Entering Formulas Directly

  Q11 = ACOS Q40 Arc tangent Inverse function of the tangent; determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the adjacent side e.g. Q12 = ATAN Q50 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 316
  When return value Q12 = 1, then Q50 >= 0 When return value Q12 = -1, then Q50 < 0 Calculate modulo value (division rest) e.g. Q12 = 400 % 360 Result: Q12 = 40 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 317: Rules For Formulas

  2 Calculation step 3 to the third power = 27 3 Calculation 100 – 27 = 73 Distributive law Law of distribution with parentheses calculation a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 318: Programming Example

  Shift the soft-key row and open the parentheses Enter Q parameter number 12 Select division Enter Q parameter number 13 Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block 37 Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 319: String Parameters

  When you use a STRING FORMULA, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string. When you use the FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 320: Assigning String Parameters

  Enter the number of the string parameter in which second substring is saved. Confirm with the ENT key Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings. Conclude with the END key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 321: Converting A Numerical Value To A String Parameter

  Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example: Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11, use 3 decimal places 37 QS11 = TOCHAR ( DAT+Q50 DECIMALS3 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 322: Copying A Substring From A String Parameter

  Example: A four-character substring (LEN4) is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character (BEG2) 37 QS13 = SUBSTR ( SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 323: Converting A String Parameter To A Numerical Value

  Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example: Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 37 Q82 = TONUMB ( SRC_QS11 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 324: Checking A String Parameter

  TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring. Example: Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13. Begin the search at the third place. 37 Q50 = INSTR ( SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 325: Finding The Length Of A String Parameter

  ENT key Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example: Find the length of QS15 37 Q52 = STRLEN ( SRC_QS15 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 326: Comparing Alphabetic Sequence

  QS parameter alphabetically +1: The first QS parameter follows the second QS parameter alphabetically Example: QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority 37 Q52 = STRCOMP ( SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 327: Reading Machine Parameters

  KEY_QS: Group name (key) of the machine parameter TAG_QS: Object name (entity) of the machine parameter ATR_QS: Name (attribute) of the machine parameter IDX: Index of the machine parameter TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 328
  Assign string parameter for key 15 DECLARE STRINGQS12 = «CFGDISPLAYDATA» Assign string parameter for entity 16 DECLARE STRINGQS13 = «AXISDISPLAYORDER» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 QS1 = Read out machine parameter CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 IDX3 ) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 329
  Assign string parameter for key 15 DECLARE STRINGQS12 = «CFGGEOCYCLE» Assign string parameter for entity 16 DECLARE STRINGQS13 = «POCKETOVERLAP» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 Q50 = CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 ) Read out machine parameter TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 330: Preassigned Q Parameters

  X axis Q109 = 0 Y axis Q109 = 1 Z axis Q109 = 2 U axis Q109 = 6 V axis Q109 = 7 W axis Q109 = 8 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 331: Spindle Status: Q110

  Q113 = 1 Tool length: Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114. The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the power is interrupted. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 332: Coordinates After Probing During Program Run

  Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles: rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC Coordinates Parameter value A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis Q122 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 333: Measurement Results From Touch Probe Cycles (See Also User’s Manual For Cycle Programming)

  Parameter value Rotation about the A axis Q170 Rotation about the B axis Q171 Rotation about the C axis Q172 Workpiece status Parameter value Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap Q182 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 334
  Status of tool measurement with TT Parameter value Tool within tolerance Q199 = 0.0 Tool is worn (LTOL/RTOL is exceeded) Q199 = 1.0 Tool is broken (LBREAK/RBREAK is Q199 = 2.0 exceeded) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 335: Programming Examples

  23 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Account for rotational position in the plane 24 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+Q8 25 Q35 = (Q6 -Q5) / Q7 Calculate angle increment 26 Q36 = Q5 Copy starting angle TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 336
  43 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 44 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 45 L Z+Q12 R0 FMAX Move to set-up clearance 46 LBL 0 End of subprogram 47 END PGM ELLIPSE MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 337: Example: Concave Cylinder Machined With Spherical Cutter

  17 CALL LBL 10 Call machining operation 18 FN 0: Q10 = +0 Reset allowance 19 CALL LBL 10 Call machining operation 20 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 338
  49 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Reset the datum shift 50 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 51 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 52 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 53 LBL 0 End of subprogram 54 END PGM CYLIN TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 339: Example: Convex Sphere Machined With End Mill

  Account for allowance in the sphere radius 28 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of sphere 29 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+Q1 30 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 31 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-Q16 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 340
  Reset the datum shift 55 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 56 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 57 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 58 LBL 0 End of subprogram 59 END PGM SPHERE MM TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 341: Programming: Miscellaneous Functions

  Programming: Miscellaneous functions…

• Page 342: Entering Miscellaneous Functions M And Stop

  M function in a STOP block: To program an interruption of program run, press the STOP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 87 STOP M6 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 343: M Functions For Program Run Inspection, Spindle And Coolant

  Spindle STOP ■ Tool change Spindle STOP Program STOP ■ Coolant ON ■ Coolant OFF ■ Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON ■ Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same as M2 ■ TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 344: Miscellaneous Functions For Coordinate Data

  The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF , See «Status displays», page 73. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 345
  See «Showing the workpiece blank in the working space (Advanced Graphic Features software option)», page 511. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 346: Moving To Positions In A Non-Tilted Coordinate System With A Tilted Working Plane: M130

  The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working plane function is active. Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius compensation. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 347: Miscellaneous Functions For Path Behavior

  15 L IX+100 … Move to contour point 15 16 L IY+0.5 … R… F… M97 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 17 L X… Y… Move to contour point 17 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 348: Machining Open Contour Corners: M98

  M98 takes effect at the end of block. Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession: 10 L X… Y… RL F 11 L X… IY… M98 12 L IX+ … TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 349: Feed Rate Factor For Plunging Movements: M103

  The feed rate for plunging is to be 20% of the feed rate in the plane. Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min): 17 L X+20 Y+20 RL F500 M103 F20 18 L Y+50 19 L IZ-2.5 20 L IY+5 IZ-5 21 L IX+50 22 L Z+5 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 350: Feed Rate In Millimeters Per Spindle Revolution: M136

  If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the TNC changes the feed rate accordingly. Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of block. You can cancel M136 by programming M137 . TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 351: Feed Rate For Circular Arcs: M109/M110/M111

  The initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle. Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block. To cancel M109 or M110, enter M111. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 352: Calculating The Radius-Compensated Path In Advance (Look Ahead): M120 (Miscellaneous Functions Software Option)

  M120 is programmed without LA, or another program is called with PGM CALL the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 353
  Before using the functions listed below, you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation: Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 19 Working plane PLANE function M114 M128 TCPM FUNCTION TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 354: Superimposing Handwheel Positioning During Program Run: M118 (Miscellaneous Functions Software Option)

  Manual Operation mode. If the tilted working plane function is not active for the Manual Operation mode, the original coordinate system is effective. M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation! TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 355
  (e.g. M118 Z5) in the M118 function and select the VT axis on the handwheel. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 356: Retraction From The Contour In The Tool-Axis Direction: M140

  With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in the positive direction. Always define a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before entering M140, otherwise the direction of traverse is not defined. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 357: Suppressing Touch Probe Monitoring: M141

  M141 functions only for movements with straight- line blocks. Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed. M141 becomes effective at the start of block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 358: Deleting Basic Rotation: M143

  M143 program startup. Effect M143 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed. M143 becomes effective at the start of the block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 359: Automatically Retract Tool From The Contour At An Nc Stop: M148

  CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch the function off. Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149. M148 becomes effective at the start of block, M149 at the end of block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 360: Rounding Corners: M197

  Effect The Function M197 is effective blockwise and is only effective on outside corners. Example NC blocks L X… Y… RL M197 DL0.876 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 361: Programming: Special Functions

  Programming: Special functions…

• Page 362: Overview Of Special Functions

  You can rapidly navigate with the cursor or mouse and select functions in the tree diagram. The TNC displays online help for the specific functions in the window on the right. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 363: Program Defaults Menu

  Define a complex contour See User’s formula Manual for Cycles Define regular machining See User’s pattern Manual for Cycles Select the point file with See User’s machining positions Manual for Cycles TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 364: Menu Of Various Conversational Functions

  Define file functions page 371 Define the positioning page 367 behavior for parallel axes U, V, Define coordinate page 372 transformations Define string functions page 319 Add comments page 131 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 365: Active Chatter Control (Acc; Software Option) 11.2

  The tool, too, is subject to heavy and irregular wear from chattering. In extreme cases it can result in tool breakage. To reduce the inclination to chattering, HEIDENHAIN now offers an effective antidote with (Active Chatter Control). The use of this control function is particularly advantageous during heavy cutting.

• Page 366: Activating/Deactivating Acc

  TNC displays the ACC symbol in the position display, See «Status displays», page 73 To deactivate ACC: Set the soft key to OFF If collision monitoring is on, in the position display the TNC shows the symbol TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 367: Working With The Parallel Axes U, V And W

  Selection of a program End of program M2 or M30 Program cancelation (PARAXCOMP remains active) PARAXCOMP OFF or PARAXMODE OFF You must deactivate the parallel-axis functions before switching the machine kinematics. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 368: Function Paraxcomp Display

  Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain-language functions Select FUNCTION PARAX Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE Define the parallel axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 369: Function Paraxcomp Off

  Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain-language functions Select FUNCTION PARAX Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Define the axes for machining TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 370: Function Paraxmode Off

  Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Select the menu for defining various plain-language functions Select FUNCTION PARAX Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 371: File Functions 11.4

  Move a file: Enter the path of the file to be moved, as well as the target path FILE Delete file: Enter the path and name DELETE of the file to be deleted TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 372: Definition Of A Datum Shift

  Incremental values always refer to the datum which was last valid (this may be a datum which has already been shifted). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 373: Trans Datum Table

  DATUM TABLE block, then the TNC uses the datum table already selected in the NC program with SEL TABLE, or the datum table with status M selected in one of the Program Run modes. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 374: Trans Datum Reset

  Select the menu for defining various plain-language functions Select transformations Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM Reset the cursor to the function TRANS AXIS Select the TRANS DATUM RESET datum shift TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 375: Creating Text Files 11.6

  Move cursor one word to the right Move cursor one word to the left Go to next screen page Go to previous screen page Go to beginning of file Go to end of file TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 376: Editing Texts

  RESTORE LINE/WORD soft key Function Soft key Delete and temporarily store a line Delete and temporarily store a word Delete and temporarily store a character Insert a line or word from temporary storage TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 377: Editing Text Blocks

  Press the READ FILE soft key. The TNC displays the dialog prompt File name = Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 378: Finding Text Sections

  Find text: Enter the text that you wish to find Find the text: Press the EXECUTE soft key Exit the search function: Press the END soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 379: Freely Definable Tables

  TNC:system proto directory. Then your template will also be available in the list box for table templates when you create a new table. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 380: Editing The Table Format

  TSTAMP: Fixed format for date and time Default value Default value for the fields in this column Width Width of the column (number of characters) Primary key First table column Language- Language-sensitive dialogs sensitive column name TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 381: Switching Between Table And Form View

  This moves the cursor to the left window, and you can select the desired line with the arrow keys. Press the green navigation key to switch back to the input window. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 382: Fn 26: Tapopen: Open A Freely Definable Table

  The table to be opened must have the file name extension .TAB. Example: Open the table TAB1.TAB, which is saved in the directory TNC:DIR1. 56 FN 26: TABOPEN TNC:DIR1TAB1.TAB TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 383: Fn 27: Tapwrite: Write To A Freely Definable Table

  Q parameters Q5, Q6 and Q7 . 53 Q5 = 3.75 54 Q6 = -5 55 Q7 = 7.5 56 FN 27: TABWRITE 5/“RADIUS,DEPTH,D“ = Q5 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 384: Fn 28: Tapread: Read From A Freely Definable Table

  «D» from line 6 of the presently opened table. Save the first value in Q parameter Q10 (second value in Q11, third value in Q12). 56 FN 28: TABREAD Q10 = 6/»RADIUS,DEPTH,D» TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 385: Programming: Multiple Axis Machining

  Programming: Multiple Axis Machining…

• Page 386: 12.1 Functions For Multiple Axis Machining

  Reduce display value of rotary axes M128 Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes M138 Selection of tilted axes M144 Calculate machine kinematics LN blocks Three-dimensional tool compensation TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 387: The Plane Function: Tilting The Working Plane (Software Option 1) 12.2

  EULER Three Euler angles: precession (EULPR), nutation (EULNU) and rotation (EULROT) VECTOR Normal vector for defining the plane and base vector for defining the direction of the tilted X axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 388
  M138 function, your machine may provide only limited tilting possibilities. You can only use the PLANE functions with tool axis The TNC only supports tilting the working plane with spindle axis Z. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 389: Defining The Plane Function

  During tilting (MOVE or TURN mode) in the Distance-To-Go mode (DIST), the TNC shows (in the rotary axis) the distance to go (or calculated distance) to the final position of the rotary axis. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 390: Resetting The Plane Function

  The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE function—or an active cycle 19—completely (angles = 0 and function is inactive). It does not need to be defined more than once. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 391: Defining The Working Plane With The Spatial Angle: Plane Spatial

  This operation corresponds to Cycle19 if the entries in Cycle 19 are defined as spatial angles on the machine side. Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 392
  Spatial A: Rotation around the X axis Spatial B: Rotation around the Y axis Spatial C: Rotation around the Z axis NC block 5 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+27 SPB+0 SPC +45 ..TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 393: Defining The Working Plane With The Projection Angle: Plane Projected

  Input range: –360° to +360° Continue with the positioning properties, See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403 NC block 5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR+24 PROMIN+24 PROROT+30 ..TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 394: Defining The Working Plane With The Euler Angle: Plane Euler

  Rotation of the tilted machining plane EULROT around the tilted Z axis Before programming, note the following Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 395
  The 0° axis is the X axis Continue with the positioning properties, See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403 NC block 5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 ..TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 396: Defining The Working Plane With Two Vectors: Plane Vector

  The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values you enter. Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 397
  5 PLANE VECTOR BX0.8 BY-0.4 BZ-0.42 NX0.2 NY0.2 NZ0.92 .. Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning VECTOR Vector BX, BY, BZ Base vector: X, components NX, NY, NZ Normal vector: X, components TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 398: Defining The Working Plane Via Three Points: Plane Points

  The three points define the slope of the plane. The position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC. Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 399
  «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403 NC block 5 PLANE POINTS P1X+0 P1Y+0 P1Z+20 P2X+30 P2Y+31 P2Z+20 P3X +0 P3Y+41 P3Z+32.5 ..Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning POINTS Points TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 400: Defining The Working Plane Via A Single Incremental Spatial Angle: Plane Spatial

  Continue with the positioning properties, See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning RELATIVE Relative to NC block 5 PLANE RELATIV SPB-45 ..TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 401: Tilting The Working Plane Through Axis Angle: Plane Axial (Fcl 3 Function)

  SEQ, TABLE ROT and COORD ROT have no function in conjunction with PLANE AXIAL. Parameter description for the positioning behavior: See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 403. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 402
  Continue with the positioning properties, See «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE 5 PLANE AXIAL B-45 ..function», page 403 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning AXIAL In the axial direction TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 403: Specifying The Positioning Behavior Of The Plane Function

  (feed rate from the TOOL CALLT block). If you use PLANE AXIAL together with STAY, you have to position the rotary axes in a separated block after the PLANE function. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 404
  TNC approaches before tilting. MB MAX positions the tool just before the software limit switch. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 405
  13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+45 SPC+0 STAY Define and activate the PLANE function 14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 F2000 Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by the Define machining in the tilted working plane TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 406
  4 If neither solution is within the traverse range, the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message. If you do not define SEQ, the TNC determines the solution as follows: TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 407
  If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a basic rotation and a tilting angle of 0, then the TNC tilts the table to the angle defined in the basic rotation. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 408: Inclined-Tool Machining In A Tilted Machining Plane (Software Option 2)

  13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-45 SPC+0 MOVE ABST50 Define and activate the PLANE function F1000 14 L IB-17 F1000 Set the incline angle Define machining in the tilted working plane TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 409: Inclined-Tool Machining Via Normal Vectors

  Define and activate the PLANE function F1000 14 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165 NX+0.3 NY+0 NZ Set the incline angle with the normal vector +0.9539 F1000 M3 Define machining in the tilted working plane TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 410: Miscellaneous Functions For Rotary Axes

  M116 is effective in the working plane. To reset M116, enter M117 . M116 is also canceled at the end of the program. M116 becomes effective at the start of block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 411: Shortest-Path Traverse Of Rotary Axes: M126

  350° 10° +20° 10° 340° –30° Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block. To cancel M126, enter M127 . At the end of program, M126 is automatically canceled. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 412: Reducing Display Of A Rotary Axis To A Value Less Than 360°: M94

  C axis to the programmed value: L C+180 FMAX M94 Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed. M94 becomes effective at the start of block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 413: Maintaining The Position Of The Tool Tip When Positioning With Tilted Axes (Tcpm): M128 (Software Option 2)

  M128. The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip. If M128 is active, the TNC shows the TCPM symbol in the status display. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 414
  Enter M129 to cancel M128. The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode. Example NC blocks Feed rate of 1000 mm/min for compensation movements: L X+0 Y+38.5 IB-15 RL F125 M128 F1000 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 415
  If the actual position deviates from the nominal position by a value greater than that defined by the machine manufacturer, the TNC outputs an error message and interrupts program run. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 416: Selecting Tilting Axes: M138

  You can reset M138 by reprogramming it without entering any axes. Example NC blocks Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C: L Z+100 R0 FMAX M138 C TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 417: Compensating The Machine’s Kinematics Configuration For Actual/Nominal Positions At End Of Block: M144 (Software Option 2)

  The machine geometry must be specified by the machine tool builder in the description of kinematics. The machine tool builder determines the behavior in the automatic and manual operating modes. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 418: Function Tcpm (Software Option 2)

  NC program: AXIS POS / AXIS SPAT Type of interpolation between start and target position: PATHCTRL AXIS / PATHCTRL VECTOR Defining the TCPM FUNCTION Select the special functions Select the programming aids Select the TCPM FUNCTION TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 419: Mode Of Action Of The Programmed Feed Rate

  AXIS SPAT determines that the TNC interprets the programmed coordinates of rotary axes as the spatial angle TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 420
  18 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT … Rotary axis coordinates are spatial angles 20 L A+0 B+45 C+0 F MAX Set tool orientation to B+45 degrees (spatial angle). Define spatial angles A and C with 0 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 421: Type Of Interpolation Between The Starting And End Position

  13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT PATHCTRL AXIS Tool tip moves along a straight line 14 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL VECTOR Tool tip and tool directional vector move in one plane TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 422: Resetting The Tcpm Function

  You can reset the TCPM FUNCTION only if the PLANE function is inactive. If required, run PLANE RESET before FUNCTION RESET TCPM. Example NC blocks 25 FUNCTION RESETTCPM Reset TCPM FUNCTION TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 423: Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Software Option 2)

  (3D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation). Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 424: Definition Of A Normalized Vector

  Machine parameter toolRefPoint defines whether the CAD system has calculated the tool length compensation from the center of sphere PT or the south pole of the sphere PSP (see figure). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 425: Permitted Tool Shapes

  NZ-0.8764339 F1000 M3 Straight line with 3-D compensation X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector Feed rate Miscellaneous function TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 426: Face Milling: 3D Compensation With Tcpm

  180°. In this case, make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 427: Peripheral Milling: 3-D Radius Compensation With Tcpm And Radius Compensation (Rl/Rr)

  There are two ways to define the tool orientation: In an LN block with the components TX, TY and TZ In an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 428
  1 L X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165 B+12.357 C+5.896 RL F1000 M128 Straight line X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point B, C: Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orientation Radius compensation Feed rate Miscellaneous function TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 429: Programming: Pallet Editor

  Programming: Pallet editor…

• Page 430: Pallet Management (Software Option)

  You can lock the execution for individual programs, fixtures or entire pallets. Non-locked lines (e.g. PGM) of a locked pallet will also not be executed. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 431
  Insert copied field Select beginning of line Select end of line Copy the current value Insert the current value Edit the current field Sort by content of column Additional functions, e.g. saving TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 432: Select Pallet Table

  Display all type .P files: Press the SELECT TYPE and SHOW P. soft keys Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and confirm with ENT Execute the pallet table: Press the NC start key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 433
  Press the OPEN PGM soft key: the TNC displays the selected program on the screen. You can now page through the program with the arrow keys To return to the pallet table, press the END PGM soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 435: Manual Operation And Setup

  Manual operation and setup…

• Page 436: Switch-On, Switch-Off

  Programming and Editing or Test Run modes of operation immediately after switching on the control voltage. You can cross the reference points later. by pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key in the Manual Operation mode. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 437
  If one of the two functions that were active before is active now, the NC START button has no function. The TNC outputs a corresponding error message. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 438: Switch-Off

  Inappropriate switch-off of the TNC can lead to data loss! Remember that pressing the END key after the control has been shut down restarts the control. Switch-off during a restart can also result in data loss! TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 439: Moving The Machine Axes

  Enter the jog increment in mm, and confirm with the ENT key Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 440: Traverse With Electronic Handwheels

  M functions. As soon as you have activated the handwheel with the handwheel activation key, the operating panel is locked. This is indicated by a pop-up window on the TNC screen. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 441
  15 NC stop (machine-dependent function, key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer) 16 Handwheel 17 Spindle speed potentiometer 18 Feed rate potentiometer 19 Cable connection, not available with the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 442
  13 STEP ON or OFF: Incremental jog active or inactive. If the function is active, the TNC also displays the active jog increment 14 Soft-key row: Selection of various functions, described in the following sections TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 443
  (e.g. by color stickers or numbers). The markings on the wireless handwheel and the handwheel holder must be clearly visible to the user! Before every use, make sure that the correct handwheel for your machine is active. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 444
  This can also happen during machining. Try to stay as close as possible to the handwheel holder and put the handwheel in its holder when you are not using it. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 445
  The handwheel sensitivity specifies the distance an axis moves per handwheel revolution. The sensitivity levels are pre-defined and are selectable with the handwheel arrow keys (only when incremental jog is not active). Selectable sensitivity levels: 0.01/0.02/0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5/1/2/5/10/20 [mm/revolution or degrees/revolution] TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 446
  Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys on the HR 5xx. The TNC shows the soft-key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the handwheel display Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 447
  0 the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10. If in addition you press the Ctrl key, the counting increment increases to 1000 Activate the new speed S with the NC start key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 448
  Press the handwheel soft key F4 (OPM) Select the desired operating mode by handwheel soft key MAN: Manual Operation MDI: Positioning with manual data input SGL: Program run, single block RUN: Program run, full sequence TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 449
  REPO). Operation is via the handwheel soft keys as with the screen soft keys, See «Returning to the contour», page 525 On/off switch for the Tilted Working Plane function (handwheel soft keys MOP and then 3D) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 450: Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F And Miscellaneous Function M

  If the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed, then the parameter value is effective. F is not lost during a power interruption TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 451: Adjusting Spindle Speed And Feed Rate

  Select the Manual Operation mode Scroll to the last soft-key row Switch on/off feed rate limit TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 452: Functional Safety Fs (Option)

  EN 12417 , and assures extensive operator protection. The basis of the HEIDENHAIN safety concept is the dual-channel processor structure, which consists of the main computer (MC) and one or more drive controller modules (CC= control computing unit).

• Page 453: Explanation Of Terms

  Safe operating stop. Provides protection against unexpected start of the drives Safely-limited speed. Prevents the drives from exceeding the specified speed limits when the protective door is opened TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 454: Checking The Axis Positions

  If necessary, pre- position the axes manually. The location of the test position is specified by your machine tool builder. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 455: Activating Feed-Rate Limitation

  When the F LIMITED soft key is set to ON, the TNC limits the maximum permissible axis speeds to the specified, safely limited speed. Select the Manual Operation mode Scroll to the last soft-key row Switch on/off feed rate limit TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 456: Additional Status Displays

  The TNC shows the active safety-related mode of operation with an icon in the header to the right of the operating mode text: Button Safety-related operating mode SOM_1 operating mode active SOM_2 mode active SOM_3 mode active SOM_4 mode active TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 457: Datum Setting Without A 3-D Touch Probe

  If you are using a preset tool, set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line 0 of the preset table. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 458: Datum Management With The Preset Table

  For safety reasons, new lines can be inserted only at the end of the preset table. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 459
  If the datum set manually is active, the TNC displays the text PR MAN(0) in the status display. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 460
  If inch display is active: Enter the value in inches, and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 461
  If inch display is active: Enter the value in inches, and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 462
  (2nd soft-key row) Insert a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft-key row) Delete a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft-key row) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 463
  To activate datums from the preset table during program run, use Cycle 247 . In Cycle 247 you define the number of the datum that you want to activate (see User’s Manual, Cycles, Cycle 247 SET DATUM). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 464: Using 3-D Touch Probes (Touch Probe Function Software Option)

  Function software option) Overview The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation mode: HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used. The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.

• Page 465: Functions In Touch Probe Cycles

  Number of touch Number of probing operations (3 to points? Angular length? Probing a full circle (360°) or a circle segment (angular length<360°) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 466
  For prepositioning, keep in mind the starting angle for the first probing operation (with an angle of 0°, the TNC probes in the positive direction of the principal axis). TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 467: Selecting Touch Probe Cycles

  You can also enter values in some of the fields. Use the arrow keys to move to the desired input field. You can position the cursor only in fields that can be edited. Fields that cannot be edited appear dimmed. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 468: Recording Measured Values From The Touch-Probe Cycles

  TCHPRMAN.TXT between the individual cycles by copying or renaming the file. Format and content of the TCHPRMAN.TXT file are preset by the machine tool builder. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 469: Writing Measured Values From The Touch Probe Cycles In A Datum Table

  Enter the datum number in the Number in table= input box Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 470: Writing Measured Values From The Touch Probe Cycles In The Preset Table

  Enter the preset number in the Number in table: input box Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key. The TNC saves the datum in the preset table under the entered number TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 471: Calibrating A 3-D Touch Trigger Probe (Software Option Touch Probe Functions)

  Measure the radius and the center offset using a stud or a calibration pin Measure the radius and the center offset using a calibration sphere TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 472: Calibrating The Effective Length

  14.7 Calibrating a 3-D touch trigger probe (software option Touch probe functions) Calibrating the effective length HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used. The effective length of the touch probe is always referenced to the tool datum.

• Page 473: Calibrating The Effective Radius And Compensating Center Misalignment

  The characteristic of whether and how your touch probe can be oriented is already defined in HEIDENHAIN touch probes. Other touch probes are configured by the machine tool builder. After the touch probe is inserted, it normally needs to be aligned exactly with the spindle axis.

• Page 474
  The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement and determines the effective ball tip radius (column R in tool.t) Orientation possible in two directions (e.g. HEIDENHAIN touch probes with cable): The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement, rotates the touch probe by 180° and then executes four more probing operations.

• Page 475: Displaying Calibration Values

  For more information about the touch probe table, refer to the User’s Manual for Cycle Programming. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 476: Compensating Workpiece Misalignment With 3-D Touch Probe (Software-Option Touch Probe Functions)

  Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3-D touch probe (Software-Option Touch probe functions) Introduction HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used. The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a «basic rotation.»…

• Page 477: Identifying Basic Rotation

  C_OFFS column with a C axis. If necessary, the view in the Preset table has to be changed with the BASIS-TRANSFORM./OFFSET soft key to display this column. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 478: Displaying A Basic Rotation

  Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 479: Datum Setting With 3-D Touch Probe (Touch Probe Function Software Option)

  «Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table», page 469 Exit the probing function: Press the END soft key. HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used.

• Page 480: Corner As Datum

  470) Exit the probing function: press the END soft key. HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used. You can identify the intersection of two straight lines by holes or studs and set this as the datum.

• Page 481
  After you set a datum or write to a zero point or preset table the ROT 1 and ROT 2 soft keys are no longer displayed. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 482: Circle Center As Datum

  More precise results are obtained if you measure circles using four touch points, however. You should always preposition the touch probe in the center, or as close to the center as possible. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 483
  Move the touch probe to the next hole, repeat the probing operation and have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have been probed to set the datum. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 484: Setting A Center Line As Datum

  This can be necessary if, for example, you would like to save the measured position in the reference and minor axis. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 485: Measuring Workpieces With A 3-D Touch Probe

  Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point: See «Corner as datum «, page 480. The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as reference point. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 486
  You can measure the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge, or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90°. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 487
  Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 488: Using Touch Probe Functions With Mechanical Probes Or Measuring Dials

  469, or See «Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table», page 470) Terminate the probing function: Press the END key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 489: Tilting The Working Plane (Software Option 1) 14.10

  See «The PLANE Function: Tilting the Working Plane (Software Option 1)», page 387 The TNC functions for «tilting the working plane» are coordinate transformations. The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 490
  (the so-called “translational” components) and offsets caused by tilting of the tool (3-D tool length compensation). The TNC only supports tilting the working plane with spindle axis Z. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 491: Traversing Reference Points In Tilted Axes

  Manual Operation mode. The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active. PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not possible. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 492: To Activate Manual Tilting

  If you use Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or the PLANE function in the part program, the angle values defined there are in effect. Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 493: Setting The Current Tool-Axis Direction As The Active Machining Direction

  Move in tool-axis direction symbol appears in the status display: This function is even available when you interrupt program run and want to move the axes manually. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 494: Setting The Datum In A Tilted Coordinate System

  The TNC does not check whether the current coordinates of the rotary axes (actual positions) agree with the tilt angles that you defined. Danger of collision! Always set a reference point in all three reference axes. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 495: Positioning With Manual Data Input

  Positioning with Manual Data Input…

• Page 496: Programming And Executing Simple Machining Operations

  It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in ISO format, and execute it immediately. You can also call TNC cycles. The program is stored in the file $MDI. In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation, the additional status displays can also be activated.

• Page 497
  6 L Z+200 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool 7 END PGM $MDI MM End of program Straight-line function: See «Straight line L», page 201 DRILLING cycle: See User’s Manual for Cycles, Cycle 200 DRILLING. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 498
  For example. L C+2.561 F50 Conclude entry Press the machine START button: The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 499: Protecting And Erasing Programs In $Mdi

  Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the $MDI file, e.g. HOLE. Copy the file Close the file manager: Press the END soft key For more information: See «Copying a single file», page 110. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 501: Test Run And Program Run

  Test run and program run…

• Page 502: Graphics (Advanced Graphic Features Software Option)

  The simulation of programs with 5-axis machining or tilted machining might run at reduced speed. With the MOD menu Graphic settings you and decrease the model quality and in that way increase the speed of simulation. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 503: Speed Of The Setting Test Runs

  You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program: Select the function for setting the simulation speed Select the desired function by soft key, e.g. incrementally increasing the simulation speed TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 504: Overview: Display Modes

  Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths Limitations during program run The result of the simulation can be faulty if the TNC’s computer is overloaded with complicated processing tasks. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 505: Plan View

  Return sectional planes to default setting: Select the function for resetting the sectional planes. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 506: 3-D View

  The high resolution 3-D view enables you to display the surface of the machined workpiece in greater detail. With a simulated light source, the TNC creates realistic light and shadow conditions. Press the 3-D view soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 507
  TNC zooms in on the defined area of the workpiece In order to quickly zoom in and out with the mouse: Rotate the wheel button forward or backward TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 508
  Such traces of machining can occur when points are output incorrectly by the postprocessor. The TNC shows traverse movements with FMAX in red. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 509: Repeating Graphic Simulation

  Tool display Regardless of the operating mode, you can also show the tool during the simulation. Function Soft key Program Run, Full Sequence / Program Run, Single Block Test Run TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 510: Measurement Of Machining Time

  Select the desired function via soft key, e.g. saving the displayed time. Stopwatch functions Soft key Store displayed time Display the sum of stored time and displayed time Clear displayed time TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 511: Showing The Workpiece Blank In The Working Space (Advanced Graphic Features Software Option)

  Note that even with BLK FORM CYLINDER, a cuboid is shown in the working space as workpiece blank. When BLK FORM ROTATION is used, no workpiece blank is shown in the working space. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 512: Functions For Program Display

  Go back in the program by one screen Go forward in the program by one screen Go to the start of the program Go to the end of the program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 513: Test Run 16.4

  In order to ensure unambiguous behavior during program run, after a tool change you should always move to a position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 514
  —even within a fixed cycle. In order to continue the test, the following actions must not be performed: Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program Selecting a new program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 515: Program Run 16.5

  Starting the program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL.T Checking and changing Q parameters Superimposing handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 516: Running A Part Program

  Program Run, Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run, Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 517: Interrupt Machining

  You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run, Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run, Single Block mode. The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 518: Moving The Machine Axes During An Interruption

  If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat, use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 519
  Press and hold the END key for two seconds. This induces a TNC system restart Remove the cause of the error Restart If you cannot correct the error, write down the error message and contact your service agency. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 520: Retraction After A Power Interruption

  TNC. The TNC selects the mode of traverse and the associated parameters automatically. If the traverse mode or the parameters were not correctly chosen, you can change them manually. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 521
  The traverse range monitoring is not available for nonreferenced axes. Observe the axes while you move them. Do not move to the limits of traverse. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 522
  YES soft key. The TNC hides the retraction dialog. Initialize the machine: if required, scan the reference points Establish the desired machine condition: if required, reset the tilted working plane TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 523: Any Entry Into Program (Mid-Program Startup)

  RESTORE POSITION. Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block. This also applies if you have only changed the tool length. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 524
  TNC will skip the end of the subprogram (LBL the TNC will reset function M126 (Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes) In such cases you must always use the mid-program startup function. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 525: Returning To The Contour

  To move the axes in any sequence: press the soft keys RESTORE X, RESTORE Z, etc., and activate each axis with the machine START button. To resume machining, press the machine START button. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 526: Automatic Program Start

  Time (hrs:min:sec): Time of day at which the program is to be started Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date on which the program is to be started To activate the start, press the OK TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 527: Optional Block Skip 16.7

  Select the INSERT soft key Erasing the «/» character In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be deleted Select the REMOVE soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 528
  Do not interrupt program run or test run at blocks containing M1: Set soft key to OFF Interrupt program run or test run at blocks containing M1: Set soft key to ON TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 529: Mod Functions

  MOD functions…

• Page 530: Mod Function

  Select the setting with the ENT key. If you don’t want to change the setting, close the window again with END. Exiting MOD functions To close the MOD functions, Press the CANCEL or END key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 531: Overview Of Mod Functions

  System settings Set the system time Define the network connection Network: IP configuration Diagnostic functions Bus diagnosis Drive diagnosis HEROS information General information Software version FCL information License information Machine times TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 532: Graphic Settings

  High High data transfer rate, exact depiction of tool geometry Medium Medium data transfer rate, approximation of tool geometry Low data transfer rate, coarse approximation of tool geometry TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 533: Machine Settings

  Select the Tool usage file menu Select the desired setting for the Program Run, Full Sequence/ Single Block and Test Run operating modes Press the APPLY soft key Press the OK soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 534: Select Kinematics

  When you switch the kinematics model for machine operation, the TNC implements all of subsequent movements with modified kinematics. Ensure that you have selected the correct kinematics in the test run for checking your workpiece. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 535: System Settings

  Press the Local/NTP soft key in order to synchronize the time entry through the NTP server Enter the host name or the URL of an NTP server Press the ADD soft key Press the OK soft key TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 536: Position Display Types

  With the MOD function Position display 1, you can select the position display in the status display. With the MOD function Position display 2, you can select the position display in the status display. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 537: Unit Of Measurement

  Program run Duration of controlled operation since being put into service The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays. Refer to your machine manual. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 538: Software Numbers

  Application The TNC requires a code number for the following functions: Function Code number Selecting user parameters Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enabling special functions for Q parameter 555343 programming TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 539
  Setting up data interfaces Serial interfaces on the TNC 620 The TNC 620 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer. The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate (machine parameter baudRateLsv2).
• Page 540
  Setting the stop bits (stopBits) The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 541
  In fileSystem you define the file system for the serial interface. This machine parameter is not required if you don’t need a special file system. EXT: Minimum file system for printers or non-HEIDENHAIN transmission software. Corresponds to the EXT1 and EXT2 modes of earlier TNC controls.
• Page 542
  FE2 and FEX modes. External device Operating Icon mode PC with HEIDENHAIN data LSV2 transfer software TNCremoNT HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units Non-HEIDENHAIN devices such as printers, scanners, punchers, PC without TNCremoNT TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 543
  For transfer of files to and from the TNC, we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software. With TNCremo, data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface. You can download the current version of TNCremo free of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase (www.heidenhain.de, Services and Documentation,…
• Page 544
  Select <File>, <Exit> Refer also to the TNCremoNT context-sensitive help texts where all of the functions are explained in more detail. The help texts must be called with the F1 key. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 545
  Press the MOD key in the Programming and Editing operating mode and enter the code number NET123. In the file manager, select the NETWORK soft key. The TNC displays the main screen for network configuration TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 546
  Only activate this function if external access forwarding via the second, optional Ethernet interface of the TNC is necessary for diagnostic purposes. Only do so after instruction by our Service Department TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 547
  Option Manually configure default GW: Manually enter the IP addresses of the default gateway Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the Cancel button TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 548
  Ask your network specialist for the proper value Group ID: Definition of the group identification with which you access files in the network. Ask your network specialist for the proper value TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 549
  IP address in the machine network. You can also select settings for these devices. Additional options button: Additional settings for the DNS/DHCP server. Set standard values button: Set factory settings. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 550
  Status log Display of status information and error messages. Press the Clear button to delete the contents of the Status Log window. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 551
  Make your firewall settings as follows: Use the mouse to open the task bar at the bottom edge of the screen (See «Window Manager», page 80) Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu. Select the Settings menu item Select the menu item.
• Page 552
  Teleservice programs from HEIDENHAIN (e.g. screenshot). If this service is blocked, the VNC configuration dialog shows a warning from HEROS that VNC is disabled in the firewall. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 553
  Advanced These settings are only intended for your options network specialists. Set standard Resets the settings to the default values values recommended by HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 554
  Connect HR button To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 555
  Click the Set power button: The TNC shows the three available power settings. Click the desired setting To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 556
  In the TNC’s file management, select the backup file (e.g. BKUP-2013-12-12_.zip). The TNC opens a pop-up window for the backup Press the emergency stop Press the OK soft key to start the backup process TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 557: Tables And Overviews

  Tables and overviews…

• Page 558: 18.1 Machine-Specific User Parameters

  The TNC saves a modification list of the last 20 changes to the configuration data. To restore modifications, select the corresponding line and press the MORE FUNCTIONS and DISCARD CHANGES soft keys. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 559
  Additional information, such as the unit of measure, the initial value, or a selection list, is also displayed. If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the TNC, the corresponding MP number is shown. TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 560
  During closed loop and M5: Display of spindle position if spindle is servo controlled and M5 is active Display or hide the PRESET TABLE soft key. True: Preset table soft key is not displayed False: Preset Table soft key is displayed TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 561
  Use the inch system DisplaySettings Format of the NC programs and cycle display Program entry in HEIDENHAIN plain language or in DIN/ISO HEIDENHAIN: Program entry in plain language in MDI mode ISO: Program entry in MDI mode in DIN/ISO format…
• Page 562
  KOREAN LATVIAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH LITHUANIAN PLC conversational language See NC conversational language PLC error message language See NC conversational language Language for online help See NC conversational language TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 563
  0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around the stylus for prepositioning 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in the plane perpendicular to the tool axis TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 564
  0.001 to 0.999 [mm]: First maximum permissible error of measurement Maximum permissible measuring error for tool measurement 0,001 to 0,999 [mm]: Second maximum permissible error of measurement Probing routine MultiDirections: Probing from multiple directions SingleDirection: Probing from one direction TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 565
  1 to 999: Number of the M function for spindle orientation Specify behavior of the NC program Reset the machining time when program starts True: Machining time is reset False: Machining time is not reset TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 566
  Line number up to which a test of the NC program is to be run 100 to 9999: Program length for which the geometry is to be checked ISO programming: Block number increment 0 to 250: Numerical increments between DIN/ISO blocks in the program TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 567
  Universal Time (Greenwich Mean Time) Time difference to universal time [h] -12 to 13: Time difference in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time Serial Interface: See «Setting up data interfaces», page 539 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 568: Connector Pin Layout And Connection Cables For Data Interfaces

  Brown Yellow Yellow Green Green Brown Brown Signal Blue Gray Gray Pink Pink Do not Violet assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 569
  Brown Signal Black Black Violet Violet Gray Gray White/ White/ Green Green Do not Green Green assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 570: Non-Heidenhain Devices

  18.2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces Non-HEIDENHAIN devices The connector layout of a non-HEIDENHAIN device may substantially differ from that of a HEIDENHAIN device. It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer. The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block.

• Page 571: Ethernet Interface Rj45 Socket

  Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length: Unshielded: 100 m Shielded: 400 m Signal Description Transmit Data TX– Transmit Data REC+ Receive Data Vacant Vacant REC– Receive Data Vacant Vacant TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 572: 18.3 Technical Information

  Feed rate in distance per minute ■ Contour elements Straight line ■ Chamfer ■ Circular path ■ Circle center point ■ Circle radius ■ Tangentially connected arc ■ Corner rounding TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 573
  Approaching and departing Via straight line: tangential or perpendicular the contour ■ Via circular arc Free contour programming FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC (FK) ■ Program jumps Subprograms ■…
• Page 574
  Multiple datum tables, for storing workpiece-related datums Datum tables Calibrate the touch probe Touch probe cycles Compensation of workpiece misalignment, manual or automatic Datum setting, manual or automatic Tools can be measured automatically Automatically measuring workpieces TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 575
  One each RS-232-C /V.24 max. 115 kilobaud ■ Expanded interface with LSV-2 protocol for external operation of the TNC over the interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo ■ Ethernet interface 100 Base T approx. 40 to 80 Mbps (depending on file type and network utilization) ■…
• Page 576
  (TCPM = Tool Center Point Management) ■ Keeping the tool normal to the contour ■ Tool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing and tool direction ■ Interpolation Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit) TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 577
  Communication with external PC applications over COM component Advanced programming features software option (option number 19) ■ FK free contour Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic programming support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC ■ Peck drilling, reaming, boring, counterboring, centering (Cycles 201 to…
• Page 578
  Continuous adaptation of the parameters of the adaptive precontrolling to the actual weight of the workpiece during machining Active Chatter Control (ACC) software option (option number 145) Fully automatic function for chatter control during machining TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 579
  Any text string in quotes (“”) Labels (LBL) for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 (5, 0) Error number with Q parameter function 0 to 1199 (4, 0) FN14 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 580: 18.4 Overview Tables

  Tapping with a floating tap holder, new ■ Rigid tapping, new ■ Bore milling ■ Tapping with chip breaking ■ Polar pattern ■ Cartesian pattern ■ Multipass milling ■ Ruled surface ■ Face milling TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 581: Miscellaneous Functions

  Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block: Coordinates are referenced to position ■ defined by machine tool builder, such as tool change position TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 582
  NOMINAL positions at end of block ■ M145 Reset M144 ■ M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring ■ M148 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop ■ M149 Reset M148 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…

• Page 583: Functions Of The Tnc 620 And The Itnc 530 Compared 18.5

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Specifications Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Axes 6 maximum 18 maximum Input resolution and display step: Linear axes 0.1µm, 0.01 µm…

• Page 584: Comparison: Accessories

  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Accessories Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Electronic handwheels HR 410 HR 420 HR 520/530/550 HR 130 HR 150 via HRA 110 Touch probes TS 220…

• Page 585: Comparison: Machine-Specific Functions

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Machine-specific functions Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Switching the traverse range Function available Function available Central drive (1 motor for multiple Function available Function available machine axes) C-axis operation (spindle motor drives…

• Page 586
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Tool compensation In the working plane, and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 X, with option 21…
• Page 587
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Constant contouring speed: Relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool’s cutting edge Parallel operation: Creating programs while another…
• Page 588
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Q parameter programming: Standard mathematical functions Formula entry String processing Local Q parameters QL Nonvolatile Q parameters QR Changing parameters during program interruption FN15:PRINT –…
• Page 589
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Graphic support 2-D programming graphics REDRAW function – Show grid lines as the background – 3-D line graphics Test graphics (plan view, projection in 3 planes, 3-D…
• Page 590
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Datum tables: for storing workpiece-related datums Preset table: for saving reference points (presets) Pallet management Support of pallet files X, option 22 Tool-oriented machining –…
• Page 591
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 CAM support: Loading of contours from DXF data X, option #42 X, option #42 Loading of machining positions from DXF data X, option 42…

• Page 592: Comparator: Cycles

  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Dynamic display of Q-parameter contents, definable – number ranges OEM-specific additional status display via Python Graphic display of residual run time –…

• Page 593
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 30, run 3-D data – 32, tolerance with HSC mode and TA 39, Cylinder surface external contour – X, option #08 200, Drilling 201, Reaming…
• Page 594
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 267 , outside thread milling X, option 19 270, contour train data for defining the behavior of Cycle 25 – 275, trochoidal milling…

• Page 595: Comparison: Miscellaneous Functions

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Miscellaneous functions Effect TNC 620 iTNC 530 Program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Program run STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/CLEAR status display (depending on machine parameter)/Return jump to block…

• Page 596
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Effect TNC 620 iTNC 530 M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working – X, option #08 with tilted axes (recommended: M115 Reset M114 M128, TCPM)

• Page 597: Comparison: Touch Probe Cycles In The Manual Operation And El. Handwheel Modes

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El. Handwheel modes Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 Touch-probe table for managing 3-D touch probes – Calibrating the effective length…

• Page 598
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 410, datum from inside of rectangle X, option 17 411, datum from outside of rectangle X, option 17 412, datum from inside of circle…

• Page 599: Comparison: Differences In Programming

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Differences in programming Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Switching the operating mode Permitted Permitted while a block is being edited File handling: Save file function Available Available Save file as…

• Page 600
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Datum table: Sorting function by values Available Not available within an axis Resetting the table Available Not available Hiding axes that are not…
• Page 601
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Handling of error messages: Help with error messages Call via ERR key Call via HELP key Switching the operating mode Help menu is closed when the…
• Page 602
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Find function: List of words recently searched Not available Available Show elements of active block Not available Available Show list of all available NC…

• Page 603: Comparison: Differences In Test Run, Functionality

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Differences in Test Run, functionality Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Test Run up to block N Function not available Function available Calculation of machining time Each time the simulation is…

• Page 604
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Behavior during presetting Presetting in a rotary axis has Rotary axis offsets defined by the same effect as an axis offset.

• Page 605: Comparison: Differences In Manual Operation, Operation

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Differences in Manual Operation, operation Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Capturing the position values Actual-position capture by soft key Actual-position capture by hard from mechanical probes Exiting the touch probe functions…

• Page 606: Comparison: Differences In Program Run, Traverse Movements

  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Program Run, traverse movements Caution: Check the traverse movements! NC programs that were created on earlier TNC controls may lead to different traverse movements or…

• Page 607
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Effect of Q parameters Q60 to Q99 (or QS60 to QS99) are Q60 to Q99 (or QS60 to QS99) always local are local or global, depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs (.cyc).
• Page 608
  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Circle programming with polar The incremental rotation angle The algebraic sign of the direction coordinates IPA and the direction of rotation…
• Page 609
  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 SLII Cycles 20 to 24: Handling of islands which are Cannot be defined with Restricted definition in complex not contained in pockets complex contour formula…

• Page 610: Comparison: Differences In Mdi Operation

  Tables and overviews 18.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 PLANE function: TABLE ROT/COORD ROT not Configured setting is used COORD ROT is used defined Machine is configured for axis All PLANE functions can be…

• Page 611: Comparison: Differences In Programming Station

  Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18.5 Comparison: Differences in programming station Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Demo version Programs with more than 100 Programs can be selected, max. NC blocks cannot be selected, an 100 NC blocks are displayed,…

• Page 612
  Feature Content Level….11 Connector pin layout for data PLC……..302, 302 Feed rate……..450 interfaces……… 568 FN20: WAIT FOR: NC and PLC Adjust……..451 Context-sensitive help….150 synchronization……302 Input options……96 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 613
  Basic settings……240 Parallel axes……367 Setting a center line as datum 484 Filter for hole positions… 253 Parameter programming:See Q Measurement of machining Selecting a contour….245 parameter programming… 272, 319 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 614
  Window Manager…… 80 Outside corners, inside Delete functions….. 376 Wireless handwheel….443 corners……..184 Finding text sections….378 Assign handwheel holder..554 Rapid traverse……158 Opening and exiting….375 Configure……. 554 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 615
  Working space monitoring 511, 514 Workpiece positions….89 Writing probing values in a datum table……… 469 Writing probing values in a preset table……… 470 Zero point shift……372 Coordinate input….. 372 ZIP archive……. 120 TNC 620 | User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming | 3/2014…
• Page 616
  Touch probes from HEIDENHAIN help you reduce non-productive time and improve the dimensional accuracy of the finished workpieces. Workpiece touch probes Signal transmission by cable TS 220 TS 440, TS 444 Infrared transmission TS 640, TS 740 Infrared transmission • Workpiece alignment •…

1. Manuals
2. Brands
3. HEIDENHAIN Manuals
4. Control Unit
5. TNC 620 Programming Station
6. User manual

Cnc

• Page 1
  TNC 620 User’s Manual Conversational Programming NC Software 817600-05 817601-05 817605-05 English (en) 10/2017…
• Page 2
  Controls and displays axes and numbers Keys Function Select coordinate axes or enter If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can . . . them in a program replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…
• Page 3
  Navigate up one page Potentiometer for feed rate Navigate down one page and spindle speed Feed rate Spindle speed Select the next tab in forms Up/down one dialog box or button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 5
  Fundamentals…

• Page 6: About This Manual

  Signal word indicating the hazard severity Type and source of hazard Consequences of ignoring the hazard, e.g.: «There is danger of collision during subsequent machining operations» Escape – Hazard prevention measures HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 7
  Would you like any changes, or have you found any errors? We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you. Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail address: tnc-userdoc@heidenhain.de HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 8
  All of the cycle functions (touch probe cycles and fixed cycles) are described in the Cycle Programming User’s Manual. If you need this user’s manual, please contact HEIDENHAIN if required. ID: 1096886-xx HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 9
  Fundamentals | Control model, software and features Software options The TNC 620 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder. Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions: Additional Axis (option 0 and option 1)
• Page 10
  Simple and convenient specification of presets Selecting graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs KinematicsOpt (option 48) Optimizing the machine kinematics Backup/restore active kinematics Test active kinematics Optimize active kinematics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 11
  Active Vibration Damping – AVD (option 46) Active vibration damping Damping of machine oscillations to improve the workpiece surface Batch Process Manager (option 154) Batch process manager Planning of production orders HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 12
  Legal information This product uses open source software. Further information is available on the control under: Programming operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 13
  New function for rounding corners, see «Rounding corners: M197», page 488 External access to the control can now be blocked with an MOD function, see «External access», page 742 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 14
  With the manual Basic Rotation touch probe cycle, workpiece misalignment can now be compensated for via a table rotation, see «Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table», page 671 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 15: New Functions 81760X

  DEPTH REFERENCE has been introduced in order to evaluate the T ANGLE, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual Probing Cycle 4 MEASURING IN 3-D has been introduced, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 16: Heidenhain | Tnc 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017

  Cycle Programming User’s Manual In Cycle 205 Universal Pecking you can now use parameter Q208 to define a feed rate for retraction, see Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 17: Programs With .Hu And .Hc Extensions Can Be Selected And

  CAD files can be opened without option number 42, see «Data Transfer from CAD Files», page 323 New software option 93 Extended Tool Management, see «Calling tool management», page 261 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 18
  Machine parameter maxLineGeoSearch (no. 105408) has been increased to max. 50000, see «Machine-specific user parameters», page 776 The names of software options number 8, 9 and 21 have changed, see «Software options», page 9 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 19
  Cycle 22 ROUGH-OUT (option 19) has been expanded by the optional parameters Q401, Q404 Cycle 484 CALIBRATE IR TT (option 17) has been expanded by the optional parameter Q536 Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 20: New Functions 81760X

  Animated help can be selected with the tilt working plane function, see «Overview», page 537 The software option number 42 DXF Converter now also produces CR circles, see «Basic settings», page 327 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 21
  999.9999, see «Managing presets», page 644 Tilting is permitted in combination with mirroring, see «The PLANE function: Tilting the working plane (option 8)», page 535 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 22
  Cycle 205 performs deburring on the coordinate surface With SL cycles, M110 is now taken into account with circles compensated inwards if it is active during machining Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 23
  Cycle 10 The transitional elements RND and CHF can now also be executed between 3-D contours, i.e. with straight line blocks with three programmed coordinates or a helix HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 24
  With functions NC/PLC Backup and NC/PLC Restore you can save and restore single directories or the complete TNC drive, see «Backup and restore», page 112 Touchscreens operation is supported, see «Operating the Touchscreen», page 123 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 25
  M124 no longer triggers an error message but only a warning. This enables NC programs with programmed M124 to run through without interruption Upper and lower cases for a file name can be modified in the file management HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 26
  «Entering the program at any point: Mid-program startup», page 727 Mid-program startup operation and dialog guidance has been improved, also for pallet tables, see «Entering the program at any point: Mid-program startup», page 727 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 27
  Cycle 251 has been expanded by parameter Q439. The finishing strategy was also revised The finishing strategy was revised with cycle 252 Cycle 275 has been expanded with parameters Q369 and Q439 Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 28
  The CAD viewer now enables you to extract data from STEP , IGES and STEP files, see «Data Transfer from CAD Files», page 323 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 29
  «Machine-specific user parameters», page 776 The control supports up to 8 control loops, including a maximum of two spindles. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 30
  To connect a USB stick you no longer have to press a soft key, see «Connecting and removing USB storage devices», page 183 The speed of setting the jog increment, spindle speed and feed rate was adjusted for electronic handwheels. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 31
  In the machine parameter decimalCharakter (no. 100805) you can define whether a period or a comma will be used as the decimal separator, see «Machine-specific user parameters», page 776 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 32
  New SERIAL column in the touch probe table Enhancement of the contour train: Cycle 25 with Residual Material Machining, Cycle 276 Three-D Contour Train Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 33: Table Of Contents

  15 Batch Process Manager………………….. 611 16 Manual Operation and Setup………………….619 17 Positioning with Manual Data Input………………693 18 Test Run and Program Run………………….699 19 MOD Functions……………………..737 20 Tables and Overviews……………………775 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 34
  Contents HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 35
  Presetting with a 3-D touch probe (option number 17)…………….. 84 Running the first program……………………85 Selecting the correct operating mode………………..85 Choosing the program you want to run………………..85 Starting the program……………………..85 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 36
  Shutting down or rebooting an external computer…………….119 Starting and stopping the connection………………..120 Accessories: HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probes and electronic handwheels……..121 3-D touch probes (Touch Probe Functions software option)…………..121 HR electronic handwheels……………………122 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 37
  Operating the simulation……………………129 Using the HEROS menu……………………130 Operating the CAD viewer……………………131 Functions in the taskbar……………………136 Icons of the taskbar……………………..136 Touchscreen Calibration……………………137 Touchscreen Configuration……………………137 Touchscreen Cleaning…………………….. 138 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 38
  Renaming a file………………………. 182 Sorting files……………………….182 Additional functions……………………..183 Additional tools for management of external file types……………184 Additional tools for ITCs……………………192 Data transfer to or from an external data carrier……………..194 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 39
  Contents The control in a network……………………196 USB devices on the control…………………….197 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 40
  Error messages……………………… 216 Display of errors………………………216 Opening the error window……………………216 Closing the error window……………………216 Detailed error messages……………………217 INTERNAL INFO soft key……………………217 FILTER soft key………………………. 217 Clearing errors……………………….218 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 41
  Informational texts……………………..220 Saving service files……………………..220 Calling the TNCguide help system…………………. 220 5.10 TNCguide context-sensitive help system………………221 Application……………………….221 Working with TNCguide……………………222 Downloading current help files………………….226 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 42
  Tool length compensation……………………256 Tool radius compensation……………………257 Tool management (option number 93)………………..260 Basics…………………………260 Calling tool management……………………261 Editing tool management……………………262 Available tool types……………………..266 Importing and exporting tool data………………….. 268 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 43
  Path contours – Polar coordinates………………..300 Overview………………………… 300 Datum for polar coordinates: pole CC………………..301 Straight line LP………………………..301 Circular path CP around pole CC………………….302 Circle CTP with tangential connection………………..302 Helix…………………………303 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 44
  Free straight line programming………………….311 Free circular path programming………………….312 Input possibilities……………………..313 Auxiliary points……………………….. 316 Relative data……………………….317 Example: FK programming 1………………….. 319 Example: FK programming 2………………….. 320 Example: FK programming 3………………….. 321 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 45
  Using the CAD viewer……………………. 326 Opening the CAD file………………………326 Basic settings……………………….327 Setting layers……………………….329 Setting a preset……………………….330 Defining the datum……………………..332 Selecting and saving a contour………………….335 Selecting and saving machining positions………………. 338 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 46
  Repeating program section repeats…………………358 Repeating a subprogram……………………359 Programming examples……………………360 Example: Milling a contour in several infeeds………………360 Example: Groups of holes……………………361 Example: Group of holes with several tools………………362 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 47
  FN 38: SEND – Send information from NC program…………….424 10.9 Accessing tables with SQL commands………………. 425 Introduction……………………….425 Overview of functions……………………..426 Programming SQL commands………………….427 Application example……………………..428 SQL BIND………………………..429 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 48
  458 Measurement results from touch probe cycles……………… 459 10.13 Programming examples……………………461 Example: Ellipse……………………… 461 Example: Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter…………..463 Example: Convex sphere machined with end mill…………….465 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 49
  Retraction from the contour in the tool-axis direction: M140…………..483 Suppressing touch probe monitoring: M141………………485 Deleting basic rotation: M143………………….486 Automatically retracting the tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148……….. 487 Rounding corners: M197……………………488 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 50
  Application……………………….512 Define FUNCTION COUNT……………………513 12.8 Creating text files……………………..514 Application……………………….514 Opening and exiting a text file………………….514 Editing texts……………………….515 Deleting and re-inserting characters, words and lines……………..515 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 51
  12.12 Dwell time FUNCTION DWELL………………….528 Programming dwell time……………………528 12.13 Lift off tool at NC stop: FUNCTION LIFTOFF……………… 529 Programming tool lift-off with FUNCTION LIFTOFF…………….529 Resetting the lift-off function………………….. 531 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 52
  Selection of tool reference point and center of rotation…………..577 Resetting FUNCTION TCPM……………………578 13.6 Three-dimensional tool compensation (option 9)…………….579 Introduction……………………….579 Suppressing error messages with positive tool oversize: M107…………580 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 53
  From 3-D model to NC program………………….589 Consider with post processor configuration………………590 Please note the following for CAM programming…………….592 Possibilities for intervention on the control………………594 ADP motion control……………………..595 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 54
  Processing pallet table……………………. 603 14.2 Pallet preset management…………………… 605 Fundamentals……………………….605 Using pallet presets……………………..605 14.3 Tool-oriented machining……………………606 Fundamentals……………………….606 Sequence of tool-oriented machining………………..608 Mid-program startup with block scan………………..609 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 55
  15.1 Batch Process Manager (option 154)………………..612 Fundamentals……………………….612 Application……………………….612 Opening the Batch Process Manager………………..615 Creating a job list……………………..615 Editing a job list……………………… 617 Executing the job list……………………… 618 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 56
  Recording measured values from the touch probe cycles…………..660 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles to a datum table……….661 Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table………662 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 57
  Position display in a tilted system………………….. 689 Limitations on working with the tilting function………………689 Activating manual tilting:……………………690 Setting the tool-axis direction as the active machining direction…………692 Setting a preset in a tilted coordinate system………………692 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 58
  Contents 17 Positioning with Manual Data Input………………693 17.1 Programming and executing simple machining operations…………694 Positioning with manual data input (MDI)………………. 695 Protecting programs in $MDI………………….697 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 59
  Returning to the contour……………………733 18.6 Automatic program start……………………734 Application……………………….734 18.7 Skipping blocks……………………..735 Application……………………….735 Delete / symbol………………………. 735 Delete / symbol………………………. 735 18.8 Optional program-run interruption………………..736 Application……………………….736 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 60
  Check parity (parity no. 106704)………………….752 Set stop bits (stopBits no. 106705)………………… 752 Set handshake (flowControl no. 106706)…………………753 File system for file operation (fileSystem no. 106707)……………. 753 Block check character (bccAvoidCtrlChar no. 106708)…………….. 753 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 61
  Application……………………….770 Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder…………..770 Setting the transmission channel………………….771 Selecting the transmitter power………………….771 Statistical data……………………….772 19.16 Load machine configuration………………….773 Application……………………….773 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 62
  Software options……………………..798 Accessories……………………….801 20.4 Overview tables……………………..802 Fixed cycles……………………….802 Miscellaneous functions……………………804 20.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared…………..806 Comparison: Specifications……………………806 Comparison: Data interfaces……………………806 Comparison: PC software……………………807 Comparison: User functions…………………… 807 Comparison: Miscellaneous functions………………..

• Page 63: First Steps With The Tnc 620

  First Steps with the TNC 620…

• Page 64: Overview

  Read and follow the safety precautions and safety symbols Use the safety devices Refer to your machine manual. Switching on the machine and traversing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 65
  The control is now ready for operation in the Manual operation mode. Further information on this topic Approaching reference points Further information: «Switch-on», page 620 Operating modes Further information: «Programming», page 92 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 66: Programming The First Part

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Programming the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can write programs only in Programming mode: Press the operating mode key The control switches to the Programming mode of operation.

• Page 67: Opening A New Program/File Management

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Opening a new program/file management Press the PGM MGT key The control opens the file manager. The file management of the control is arranged much like the file management on a PC with Windows Explorer.

• Page 68: Defining A Workpiece Blank

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Defining a workpiece blank After you have created a new program you can define a workpiece blank. For example, define a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points, each with reference to the selected preset.

• Page 69: Program Layout

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner. This makes it easier to find your place, accelerates programming and reduces errors. Recommended program layout for simple, conventional…

• Page 70
  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs Example 0 BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM 1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X… Y… Z… 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X… Y… Z… 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF POS1( X…

• Page 71: Programming A Simple Contour

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Programming a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm. You have already defined the workpiece blank. After you have initiated a dialog through a function key, enter all the data requested by the control in the screen header.

• Page 72
  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Press the approach function soft key APPR CT: Enter the coordinates of the contour starting in X and Y, e.g. 5/5, confirm with the ENT point Center angle? Enter the approach angle, e.g.
• Page 73
  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Retracting tool: Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached, e.g. 250. Press the ENT key Confirm Tool radius comp: RL/RR/no comp?

• Page 74: Creating A Cycle Program

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Creating a cycle program The holes (depth of 20 mm) shown in the figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle. You have already defined the workpiece blank.

• Page 75
  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Run the drilling cycle on the defined pattern: Confirm Feed rate F=? with the ENT key: Move at rapid traverse (FMAX) Miscellaneous function M? Switch on the spindle and coolant, e.g. M13, and confirm with the END key The control stores the entered positioning block.
• Page 76
  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Programming the first part Example 0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM 1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Workpiece blank definition 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S4500…

• Page 77: Graphically Testing The First Part (Option 20)

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Graphically testing the first part (option 20) Graphically testing the first part (option 20) Selecting the correct operating mode You can test programs in the Test Run operating mode: Press the operating mode key The control switches to the Test Run mode of operation.

• Page 78: Choosing The Program You Want To Test

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Graphically testing the first part (option 20) Choosing the program you want to test Press the PGM MGT key The control opens the file manager. Press the LAST FILES soft key The control opens a pop-up window with the most recently selected files.

• Page 79: Starting The Test Run

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Graphically testing the first part (option 20) Starting the test run Press the RESET + START soft key The control resets the previously active tool data The control simulates the active program up to a…

• Page 80: Setting Up Tools

  When measuring on the machine: store the tools in the tool changer Further information: «The pocket table TOOL_P .TCH», page 82 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 81: The Tool Table Tool.t

  «Modes of operation», page 91 Working with the tool table Further information: «Entering tool data into the table», page 234 Using the tool management (option 93) Further information: «Calling tool management», page 261 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 82: The Pocket Table Tool_P .Tch

  Further information on this topic Operating modes of the control Further information: «Modes of operation», page 91 Working with the pocket table Further information: «Pocket table for tool changer», page 246 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 83: Workpiece Setup

  Presetting with a 3-D touch probe Further information: «Presetting with a 3-D touch probe (option number 17)», page 676 Presetting without 3-D touch probe Further information: «Presetting without a 3-D touch probe», page 652 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 84: Presetting With A 3-D Touch Probe (Option Number 17)

  To set to 0: Press the SET PRESET soft key Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Presetting Further information: «Presetting with a 3-D touch probe (option number 17)», page 676 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 85: Running The First Program

  First Steps with the TNC 620 | Running the first program Running the first program Selecting the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Program run, single block or the Program run, full sequence mode: Press the operating mode key…

• Page 87: Introduction

  Introduction…

• Page 88: The Tnc 620

  Compatibility Machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls (starting from the TNC 150 B) may not always run on the TNC 620. If the NC blocks contain invalid elements, the control will mark these as ERROR blocks or with error messages when the file is opened.

• Page 89: Visual Display Unit And Operating Panel

  Soft-key selection keys for machine tool builders Keys for switching the soft keys for machine tool builders USB connection If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

• Page 90: Setting Screen Layout

  Control panel The TNC 620 is delivered with an integrated operating panel. As an alternative, the TNC 620 is also available with a separate display unit and an operating panel with an alphabetic keyboard. Alphabetic keyboard for entering texts and file names, as well…

• Page 91: Modes Of Operation

  Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program Left: program, right: status display Left: program, right: collision object HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 92: Programming

  (Option 20) Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program Left: program, right: status display Left: program, right: graphics (option 20) Graphic (Option 20) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 93: Program Run, Full Sequence And Program Run, Single Block

  Soft keys for screen layout with pallet tables(option 22 Pallet management) Soft key Window Pallet table Left: program, right: pallet table Left: pallet table, right: status display Left: pallet table, right: graphics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 94: Status Displays

  Axes are moving under a 3-D basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane Axes are mirrored and moved The M128 function or FUNCTION TCPM is active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 95
  Pulsing spindle speed function is active The order of icons can be changed with the optional machine parameter iconPrioList (no. 100813). The control-in-operation symbol is always visible and cannot be configured. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 96: Additional Status Displays

  Tool information Active M functions Active coordinate transformations Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name and path of the active main program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 97
  Information on standard cycles (CYC tab) Soft key Meaning No direct Active fixed cycle selection possible Active values of Cycle 32 Tolerance HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 98
  Tool measurement (TT tab) The control displays this tab only if the function is active on your machine. Soft key Meaning No direct Active tool selection possible Measured values from tool measurement HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 99
  The result of Q1 = COS 89.999 * 0.001 is shown by the control as +1.74532925e-08, whereby e-08 corresponds to the factor of 10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 100: Window Manager

  In this case, switch to the window manager and correct the problem. If required, refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 101: Overview Of Taskbar

  HEIDENHAIN symbol between the workspaces by pressing and holding the left mouse button. Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can get information, make settings or start applications. The following functions are available:…

• Page 102
  «VNC», page 110 WindowManagerConfig: Available only to authorized specialists Firewall: Configure the firewall Further information: «Firewall», page 763 HePacketManager: Available only to authorized specialists HePacketManager Custom: Available only to authorized specialists HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 103
  The applications available under tools can be started directly by selecting the corresponding file type in the file management of the control Further information: «Additional tools for management of external file types», page 184 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 104: Portscan

  Select the Diagnostic menu item Select the Portscan menu item The control opens the HeRos Portscan pop-up window. Press the Automatic update on key Set the time interval with the slider HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 105: Remote Service

  With an NC software installation a temporary certificate is automatically installed on the control. An installation, also in the form of an update, may only be carried out by a service technician from the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 106
  Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu Select the Diagnostic menu item Select the RemoteService menu item Enter the Session key of the machine tool builder HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 107: Printer

  FN functions, e.g. during probing. Standard printer Select to define the standard printer in case several printers are available. Is defined automatically when creating the first printer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 108
  Using the FN 16: F-PRINT function Further information: «Printing messages», page 391 List of printable files: Text files Graphic files PDF files The connected printer must be PostScript-enabled. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 109: Selinux Security Software

  Starting the SELinux configuration: The configuration of SELinux is usually password-protected by your machine manufacturer; refer here to the relevant machine manual HEIDENHAIN recommends activating SELinux because it provides additional protection against attacks from outside. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 110: Vnc

  Manual Manually entered client Denied This client is not permitted to connect TeleService/IPC 61xx Client via TeleService connection DHCP Other computer that obtains an IP address from this computer HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 111
  This dialog makes it possible to refuse that the focus be given to the requesting client. If this does not occur, the focus changes to the requesting client after the set time limit. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 112: Backup And Restore

  Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu Select the Tools menu item Open the NC/PLC Backup or NC/PLC Restore menu item The control opens the pop-up window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 113
  Select the next step with the FORWARD soft key The control generates the backup file. Confirm with the OK soft key The control concludes the backup process and restarts the NC software. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 114
  Stop the control if required with the STOP NC SOFTWARE soft Extract the archive The control restores the files. Confirm with the OK soft key The control restarts the NC software. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 115: Remote Desktop Manager (Option 133)

  HEIDENHAIN assures a functioning connection between HEROS 5 and the IPC 6641. No guarantee is given for other combinations and connections. If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

• Page 116: Configuring Connections — Windows Terminal Service (Remotefx)

  Select the desired operating system Win XP Win 7 Win 8.X Win 10 Another Windows Press OK The control opens the Edit the connection pop-up window. Edit the connection HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 117
  This prevents that two users access the control simultaneously. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 118: Configuring The Connection — Vnc

  Host name or IP address of the external computer. In the recom- Required mended configuration of the IPC 6641, the IP address 192.168.254.3 is used Password Password for connecting to the VNC server Required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 119: Shutting Down Or Rebooting An External Computer

  The control switches to the desktop of the connection. Single click with the right mouse button The control displays the connection menu. Move to the following Not active with this connection – workspace HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 120: Starting And Stopping The Connection

  Further information: «Shutting down or rebooting an external computer», page 119 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 121: Accessories: Heidenhain 3-D Touch Probes And Electronic Handwheels

  A wear-resistant optical switch generates the trigger signal. With the TT 160, signal transmission is by cable. The TT 460 supports infrared and radio transmission. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 122: Hr Electronic Handwheels

  Several electronic handwheels can also be connected simultaneously and used alternatively on controls with the (HSCI: HEIDENHAIN Serial Controller Interface) serial interface for control components. Configuration is performed via the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 123: Operating The Touchscreen

  Operating the Touchscreen…

• Page 124: Display Unit And Operation

  The touchscreen is distinguished by a black frame and the lack of soft-key selection keys. The TNC 620 has its operating panel integrated in the 19” screen. Header When the control is on, the screen displays the selected operating modes in the header.

• Page 125: Operating Panel

  In addition, the machine tool builder supplies a machine operating panel. Refer to your machine manual. External keys, e.g.NC START or NC STOP, are described in your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 126
  Tap on the operating mode in the header modes Shift the soft-key row Swipe horizontally over the soft-key row Soft-key selection keys Tap on the function in the touchscreen HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 127: Gestures

  Continuous contact of fingertip on the screen Swipe Flowing motion over the screen Drag A combination of long-press and then swipe, moving a finger over the screen when the starting point is clear- ly defined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 128: Navigating In The Table And Nc Programs

  You can navigate in an NC program or a table as follows: Symbol Gesture Function Mark the NC block or table line Stop scrolling Double tap Activate the table line Swipe Scroll through the NC program or table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 129: Operating The Simulation

  Function Double tap Set the graphic to its original size Drag Rotate the graphic (only 3-D graphics) Two-finger drag Move graphics Spread Magnify the graphic Pinch Reduce the graphic HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 130: Using The Heros Menu

  Gesture Function Select the measuring point Using the HEROS menu You can use the HEROS menu as follows: Symbol Gesture Function Select the application Long press Open the application HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 131: Operating The Cad Viewer

  Activate Add and double-tap on Reset the graphic or 3-D model to its original size and the background angle Drag Rotate the graphic or 3-D model (only in the Layer Setting mode) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 132
  Select element Tap on an element in the list- Select or deselect an element view window Activate Add and tap on an Part, shorten, or lengthen and element element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 133
  Reset the graphic to its original size Swipe over an element Show a preview of selected elements Show element information Two-finger drag Move graphics Spread Magnify the graphic Pinch Reduce the graphic HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 134
  Show a preview of selected elements Show element information Activate Add and drag Spread a fast selection area Activate Remove and drag Spread an area for deselection of elements Two-finger drag Move graphics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 135
  The control automatically switches to the Programming mode of operation. Use the task bar to leave the CAD-Viewer open on the third desktop The third desktop stays active in the background HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 136: Functions In The Taskbar

  Return to main menu Show active applications Show all applications If you have set the view to active applications, you can close specific applications as in a task manager. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 137: Touchscreen Calibration

  Disable Touchfingers to hide the touch points Enable Single Touchfinger to show the touch point Enable Full Touchfingers to show the touch points of all fingers involved Confirm with OK HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 138: Touchscreen Cleaning

  The control locks the screen for 90 seconds. Clean the screen If you would like to stop the cleaning mode: Pull the displayed sliders apart at the same time HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 139: Fundamentals, File Management

  Fundamentals, File Management…

• Page 140: Fundamentals

  With absolute encoders, an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch-on. In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re-established directly after switch-on. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 141: Reference Systems

  Tool Coordinate System All reference systems build up on each other. They are subject to the kinematic chain of the specific machine tool. The machine coordinate system is the reference system. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 142
  Refer to the machine tool builder’s documentation Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets Check the display of the PAL tab before you start machining HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 143
  The ACTL. and NOML. displays show movements of the Y axis and Z axis in the input coordinate system. The user can program positions related to the machine datum, e.g. by using the miscellaneous function M91. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 144
  Refer to the machine tool builder’s documentation Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets Check the display of the PAL tab before you start machining HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 145: And Cycle

  When used in conjunction with PLANE AXIAL and Cycle 19, the programmed transformations (mirroring, rotation and scaling) do not affect the position of the tilt datum or the orientation of the rotary axes HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 146: Heidenhain | Tnc 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017

  Other transformations are of course possible in the working plane coordinate system. Further information: «Working plane coordinate system WPL-CS», page 147 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 147
  3-axis machine tools or with pure 3-axis machining. The BASE TRANSFORM. values of the active line of the preset table have a direct effect on the input coordinate system with this assumption. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 148
  Orientation of the tool coordinate system can be performed in various reference systems. Further information: «Tool coordinate system T-CS», page 149 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 149
  7 L A+0 B+45 C+0 R0 F2500 7 LN X+48 Y+102 Z-1.5 NX-0.04658107 NY0.00045007 NZ0.8848844 TX-0.08076201 TY-0.34090025 TZ0.93600126 R0 M128 7 LN X+48 Y+102 Z-1.5 NX-0.04658107 NY0.00045007 NZ0.8848844 R0 M128 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 150
  + DR PROG PROG → toroid cutter or toroidal cutter Without the TCPM function or miscellaneous function M128, orientation of the tool coordinate system and input coordinate system is identical. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 151: Designation Of The Axes On Milling Machines

  The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes. These coordinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA. Coordinates of the pole Reference axis of the angle (plane) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 152: Absolute And Incremental Workpiece Positions

  Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute coordinates always refer to the pole and the angle reference axis. Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 153: Selecting The Preset

  X=450 Y=750. By using the Datum shift cycle you can shift the datum temporarily to the position X=450, Y=750 and program the holes to 7) without further calculations. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 154: Creating And Writing Programs

  The control does not automatically check whether collisions can occur between the tool and the workpiece. There is danger of collision during the approach movement after a tool change! If necessary, program an additional safe auxiliary position HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 155: Defining The Blank: Blk Form

  1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Spindle axis, MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 156
  If you define a rotationally symmetric blank with incremental coordinates, the dimensions are then independent of the diameter programming. The subprogram can be designated with a number, an alphanumeric name, or a QS parameter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 157
  7 L X+70 8 L Z-100 9 L X+0 10 L Z+1 Contour end 11 LBL 0 End of subprogram 12 END PGM NEW MM Program end, name, unit of measure HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 158: Creating A New Nc Program

  The control automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks. If you do not wish to define a blank form, cancel the dialog at Working plane in graphic: XY using the DEL key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 159: Programming Tool Movements In Klartext

  MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M ? 3 (enter the miscellaneous function M3 Spindle on) With the END key, the control ends this dialog. Example 3 L X+10 Y+5 R0 F100 M3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 160
  The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT column. Functions for conversational guidance Ignore the dialog question End the dialog immediately Abort the dialog and erase the block HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 161: Actual Position Capture

  (e.g. for radius compensation), then the control closes the soft-key row for axis selection. The actual-position-capture function is not allowed if the Tilt working plane function is active. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 162: Editing An Nc Program

  ENT key. Or: Press the GOTO key, enter the block number step and jump up or down the number of entered lines by pressing the N LINES soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 163
  Confirm with the OK soft key or the ENT key, or press the CANCEL soft key to abort The file saved with SAVE AS can also be found in the file management by pressing the LAST FILES soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 164
  If you start a search in a very long NC program, the control shows a progress indicator. You can cancel the search at any time, if necessary. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 165
  Using the arrow keys, select the block after which you wish to insert the copied (cut) program section Insert the saved program section: Press the INSERT BLOCK soft To end the marking function, press the CANCEL SELECTION soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 166: The Control’s Search Function

  Repeat the search process The control moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for. Terminate the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 167
  To replace all text occurrences, press the REPLACE ALL soft key. To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key Terminate the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 168: File Management: Basics

  With the control you can manage and save files up to a total size of 2 GB. Depending on the setting, the control generates backup files with the extension *.bak after editing and saving of NC programs. This reduces the available memory space. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 169
  The maximum permitted path length is 255 characters. The path length consists of the drive characters, the directory name and the file name, including the extension. Further information: «Paths», page 171 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 170: Displaying Externally Generated Files On The Control

  Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance, if necessary. Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so that the control always has enough hard-disk space for system files (such as the tool table). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 171: Working With The File Manager

  PROG1.H was copied into it. The part program now has the following path: TNC:AUFTR1NCPROGPROG1.H The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 172: Overview: Functions Of The File Manager

  Customize table view Manage network drives Select the editor Sort files by properties Copy a directory Delete directory with all its subdirectories Refresh directory Rename a directory Create a new directory HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 173: Calling The File Manager

  Date that the file was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited To display the dependent files, set the machine parameter dependentFiles (no. 122101) to MANUAL. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 174: Selecting Drives, Directories And Files

  Step 1: Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window To select a drive, press the SELECT soft key, or Press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 175
  If you enter the first letter of the file you are looking for in file management, the cursor automatically jumps to the first program with the same letter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 176: Creating A New Directory

  The original file is retained. When you start the copying process with the ENT key or the OK soft key, the control displays a pop-up window with a progress indicator. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 177: Copying Files Into Another Directory

  To leave the files as they are, press the CANCEL soft key If you want to overwrite a protected file, select the Protected files field or cancel the process. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 178: Copying A Table

  Press the TAG soft key Select additional lines, if required Press the SAVE AS soft key Enter a name for the table in which the selected lines are to be saved HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 179: Copying A Directory

  The control asks whether you want to delete the file. To confirm the deletion, press the OK soft key; or To cancel deletion, press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 180: Deleting A Directory

  The control asks you whether you really want to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files. To confirm the deletion, press the OK soft key; or To cancel deletion, press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 181: Tagging Files

  To copy tagged files: Leave the active soft-key row Press the COPY soft key To delete tagged files: Leave the active soft-key row Press the DELETE soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 182: Renaming A File

  Press the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion SORT BY NAME SORT BY SIZE SORT BY DATE SORT BY TYPE SORT BY STATUS UNSORTED HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 183: Additional Functions

  To remove a USB device, proceed as follows: Move the cursor to the left-hand window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Remove the USB device Further information: «USB devices on the control», page 197 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 184: Additional Tools For Management Of External File Types

  Adjust the setting in the TNCremo data transfer software, if required (menu item >Extras > Configuration > Mode). If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

• Page 185
  Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the File pull-down menu. PDF viewer Move the cursor to the Close menu item. Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 186
  Press the key for switching the soft keys additional tool opens the File pull- Gnumeric down menu. Move the cursor to the Close menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 187
  If you position the mouse pointer over a button, a brief tool tip explaining the function of this button will be displayed. More information on how to use is available in Help. Browser HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 188
  Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. Do not change the Web Browser version. Otherwise, the security settings of SELinux will block the execution of Web Browser. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 189
  Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the ARCHIVE pull-down menu. Xarchiver Move the cursor to the Exit menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 190
  Select the Tools and Leafpad menu items in the pull-down menu Proceed as follows to exit Leafpad: Use the mouse to select the File menu item Select Exit The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 191
  Press the key for switching the soft keys opens the File pull-down menu. ristretto Move the cursor to the Exit menu item Press the ENT key The control returns to the file management. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 192: Additional Tools For Itcs

  Using the additional ITC Gestures tool, the machine manufacturer configures the gesture control on the touch screen. Refer to your machine manual. This function may only be used with the permission of your machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 193
  Start the tool in control using the task bar The ITC opens a pop-up window with three options Select Touch Sensitivity Press the OK button The ITC closes the pop-up window HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 194: Data Transfer To Or From An External Data Carrier

  Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the file you wish to transfer: Moves the cursor up and down within a window Moves the cursor from the right to the left window, and vice versa HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 195
  A status window appears on the control, informing about the copying progress, or Stop transfer: Press the WINDOW soft key The control displays the standard file manager window again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 196
  Auto column if the connec- tion is established automatically Set up new network connection Remove Delete existing network connection Copy Copy network connection Edit Edit network connection Clear Delete the status window HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 197
  The dialog is closed with the HIDE soft key and file transfer is continued in the background. The control displays a warning until file transfer is completed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 198
  Fundamentals, File Management | Working with the file manager Removing USB devices To remove a USB device, proceed as follows: Move the cursor to the left-hand window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Remove the USB device HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 199: Programming Aids

  Programming Aids…

• Page 200: Screen Keypad

  SPECIAL CHARACTERS soft key and insert them. Use the BACKSPACE soft key to delete individual characters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 201: Adding Comments

  Press the INSERT COMMENT soft key Alternative: Press the < key on the alphabetic keyboard The control inserts a semicolon ; at the beginning of the block. Press the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 202: Functions For Editing Of The Comment

  Jump to the beginning of a word. Use a space to separate words Jump to the end of a word. Use a space to separate words Switch between paste and overwrite mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 203: Freely Editing An Nc Program

  The control opens a new NC block. Add the desired syntax Confirm your entry with END After confirmation, the control checks the syntax. Errors will result in ERROR blocks. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 204: Display Of Nc Programs

  Screen content can be shifted with the mouse using the scroll bar at the right edge of the program window. In addition, the size and position of the scrollbar indicates program length and cursor position. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 205: Structuring Programs

  Displaying the program structure window / Changing the active window Display structure window: For this screen layout press the PROGRAM + STRUCTURE soft key Change the active window: Press the CHANGE WINDOW soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 206: Inserting A Structure Block In The Program Window

  If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block, the control at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window. This way you can quickly skip large program sections. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 207: Calculator

  Add value to buffer memory Save the value to buffer memory Recall from buffer memory Delete buffer memory contents Natural logarithm Logarithm Exponential function Check the algebraic sign Form the absolute value HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 208
  The calculator remains in effect even after a change in operating modes. Press the END soft key to close the calculator. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 209
  Open the cutting data calculator You can also shift the calculator with the arrow keys on your keyboard. If you have connected a mouse you can also position the calculator with this. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 210: Cutting Data Calculator

  F AUTO soft key. If you have to change the feed rate later, you only need to adjust the feed rate value in the TOOL CALL block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 211
  Switch to the pocket calculator Move the cutting data calculator in the direction of the arrow Use inch values in the cutting data calculator Close the cutting data calculator HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 212: Programming Graphics

  RND light blue: holes and threads ocher: tool midpoint path red: rapid traverse Further information: «FK programming graphics», page 309 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 213: Generating A Graphic For An Existing Program

  Selecting views Plan view Front view Page view Display or hide tool paths Display or hide tool paths in rapid traverse HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 214: Block Number Display On/Off

  Shift the soft-key row Erase the graphics: Press the CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key Showing grid lines Shift the soft-key row Show grid lines: Press the Show grid lines soft HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 215: Magnification Or Reduction Of Details

  After you release the left mouse button, the control zooms in on the defined area. To rapidly magnify or reduce any area, rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 216: Error Messages

  The control opens the error window and displays all accumulated error messages. Closing the error window Press the END soft key; or Press the ERR key The control closes the error window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 217: Detailed Error Messages

  Open the error window Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FILTER soft key The control filters the identical warnings Leave Filter: Press the GO BACK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 218: Clearing Errors

  Set the current error log if required: Press the CURRENT FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file, and the most recent entry is at the end. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 219: Keystroke Log

  Soft key/Keys Function Go to beginning of keystroke log Go to end of keystroke log Find text Current keystroke log Previous keystroke log Up/down one line Return to main menu HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 220: Informational Texts

  There you will find further, more detailed information on the error message concerned. Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages Call the help for HEIDENHAIN machine-specific error messages, if available HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 221: 5.10 Tncguide Context-Sensitive Help System

  .chm files. As an option, your machine tool builder can embed machine-specific documentation in the TNCguide. These documents then appear as a separate book in the main.chm file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 222: Working With Tncguide

  Press the HELP key. The control opens the Help system and shows the description of the active function. This does not apply for miscellaneous functions or cycles from your machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 223
  Select the page last shown Page forward if you have used the Select page last shown function Move up by one page Move down by one page HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 224
  The control synchronizes the subject index and creates a list in which you can find the subject more easily. Use the ENT key to call the information on the selected keyword HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 225
  If you activate the Search only in titles function, the control searches only through headings and ignores the body text. To activate the function, use the mouse or select it and then press the space bar to confirm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 226: Downloading Current Help Files

  When using TNCremo to transfer the .chm files to the control, select the binary mode for files with the .chm extension. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 227
  Danish TNC:tncguidefi Finnish TNC:tncguidenl Dutch TNC:tncguidepl Polish TNC:tncguidehu Hungarian TNC:tncguideru Russian TNC:tncguidezh Chinese (simplified) TNC:tncguidezh-tw Chinese (traditional) TNC:tncguidesl Slovenian TNC:tncguideno Norwegian TNC:tncguidesk Slovak TNC:tncguidekr Korean TNC:tncguidetr Turkish TNC:tncguidero Romanian HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 229: Tools

  Tools…

• Page 230: Entering Tool-Related Data

  You can adjust the feed rate during the program run with the feed rate potentiometer F . The feed rate potentiometer lowers the programmed feed rate, not the feed rate calculated by the control. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 231: Spindle Speed S

  Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed potentiometer S. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 232: Tool Data

  The entire tool length is essential for the control in order to perform numerous functions involving multi-axis machining. Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 233: Delta Values For Lengths And Radii

  In the programming dialog, you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key. Example 4 TOOL DEF 5 L+10 R+5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 234: Entering Tool Data Into The Table

  You can select the table view with the Screen Layout key. You can choose between a list view and a form view. Other settings, such as HIDE/ SORT/ COLUMNS, can be made after the file is open. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 235
  Enter the original tool number into the Tool number input field Confirm with OK The control adds the additional lines to the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 236
  Current age of the tool in minutes: The control automati- cally counts the current tool life (CUR_TIME: For CURrent TIME) A starting value can be entered for used tools HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 237
  Date/time of last tool call CALL PTYP Tool type for pocket table? Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table Function is defined by the machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 238
  Tool life expired Time for exceeding the tool life in minutes Further information: «Overtime for tool life», page 253 Function is defined by the machine manufacturer. Refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 239
  If the entered value is exceeded, the control locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm For a description of the cycles governing automatic tool measurement, Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 240
  Select the table start Select the table end Select the previous page in the table Select the next page in the table Find the text or number Go to beginning of line HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 241
  Delete the current line (tool) Sort the tools according to the content of a column Select possible entries from a pop-up window Reset the value Place the cursor in the current cell HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 242
  Show all drills in the tool table Show all cutters in the tool table Show all taps/thread cutters in the tool table Show all touch probes in the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 243: Importing Tool Tables

  ADAPT NC PGM / TABLE function. The machine tool builder can define update rules that make it possible, for example, to automatically remove umlauts from tables and NC programs. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 244
  If you export a tool table from an iTNC 530 and import it into a TNC 620, you have to adapt its format and content before you can use the tool table. On the TNC 620, you can adapt the tool table conveniently with the ADAPT NC PGM / TABLE function. The control converts the contents of the imported tool table to a format valid for the TNC 620 and saves the changes to the selected file.

• Page 245: Overwriting Tool Data From An External Pc

  (e.g. TST.T) is overwritten. All other tool data of the table TOOL.T remains unchanged. The procedure for copying tool tables using the file manager is described in the file management. Further information: «Copying a table», page 178 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 246: Pocket Table For Tool Changer

  Press the POCKET TABLE soft key Set the EDIT soft key to ON. On your machine this might not be necessary or even possible. Refer to your machine manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 247
  Box magazine: Lock the pocket below below? LOCKED_LEFT Lock the pocket at Box magazine: Lock the pocket at left left? LOCKED_RIGHT Lock the pocket at Box magazine: Lock the pocket at right right? HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 248
  Place the cursor in the current cell Sort the view Refer to your machine manual. The machine manufacturer defines the features, properties and designations of the various display filters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 249: Calling The Tool Data

  If the tool axis is also entered in the TOOL CALL block, the control will insert a replacement tool if a replacement tool was defined. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 250
  If you are working with tool tables, use a TOOL DEF block to preselect the next tool. Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter, or type the tool name in quotation marks. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 251: Tool Change

  Directly before a departure function DEP Directly before and after CHF and RND During execution of macros During execution of a tool change Directly after a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF During execution of SL cycles HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 252
  100. If you want to reset the current age of a tool (e.g. after changing the indexable inserts), enter the value 0 in the CUR_TIME column. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 253
  With deviations, the control displays an error message and does not replace the tool. You can suppress this message with the M function M107, and reactivate it with M108. Further information: «Three-dimensional tool compensation (option 9)», page 579 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 254: Tool Usage Test

  TOOL.T Tool number (–1: Tool not inserted yet) Tool index NAME Tool name from the tool table TIME Tool usage time in seconds (feed time without rapid traverse movements) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 255
  Press the OK soft key The control closes the pop-up window. Alternative: Press the ENT key You can query the tool usage test with the FN 18 ID975 NR1 function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 256: Tool Compensation

  Tool length L from TOOL DEF block or tool table Oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block TOOL CALL Oversize for length DL in the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 257: Tool Radius Compensation

  Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation: R0 The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path, or to the programmed coordinates. Applications: Drilling and boring, pre-positioning HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 258
  Select tool movement to the right of the contour: Press the RR soft key, or Select tool movement without radius compensation or cancel radius compensation: Press the ENT key Terminate the block: Press the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 259
  Incorrect positions can lead to contour damage. Danger of collision during machining! Program safe approach and departure positions at a sufficient distance from the contour Consider the tool radius Consider the approach strategy HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 260: Tool Management (Option Number 93)

  If you edit a tool in tool management, the selected tool is locked. If this tool is required in the NC program being used, the control shows the message: Tool table locked. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 261: Calling Tool Management

  «Tool usage test», page 254 If a pallet table is selected in the Program Run operating mode, the Tooling list and T usage order are calculated for the entire pallet table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 262: Editing Tool Management

  SHIFT COLUMN active: The column can be moved by drag and drop Reset the manually changed settings (move columns) to the original condition HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 263
  EDIT ON/OFF soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 264
  Discard all changes made since the form was called Add tool index Delete tool index Copy the tool data of the selected tool Insert the copied tool data in the selected tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 265
  Regularly back up important data to external drives The tool data of tools still stored in the pocket table cannot be deleted. The tools must be removed from the magazine first. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 266: Available Tool Types

  Piloted counterbore(TSINK),TSINK Boring tool,BOR Back boring tool,BCKBOR Thread mill,GF Thread mill w/ countersink,GSF Thread mill w/ single thread,EP Thread mill w/ indxbl insert,WSP Thread milling drill,BGF Circular thread mill,ZBGF HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 267
  Tools | Tool management (option number 93) Icon Tool type Tool type number Roughing cutter (MILL_R),MILL_R Finishing cutter (MILL_F),MILL_F Rough/finish cutter,MILL_RF Floor finisher(MILL_FD),MILL_FD Side finisher (MILL_FS),MILL_FS Face milling cutter,MILL_FACE HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 268: Importing And Exporting Tool Data

  Use the arrow keys or mouse to select the file to be imported and confirm with the ENT key The control shows a pop-up window with the content of the CSV file Start the import procedure with the EXECUTE soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 269
  Example T,L,R,DL,DR Line 1 with column names 4,125.995,7.995,0,0 Line 2 with tool data 9,25.06,12.01,0,0 Line 3 with tool data 28,196.981,35,0,0 Line 4 with tool data HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 270
  The control shows a pop-up window with the status of the export process Terminate the export process by pressing the END key or soft By default the control stores the exported CSV file in the TNC:systemtooltab directory. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 271: Programming Contours

  Programming Contours…

• Page 272: Tool Movements

  With the control’s miscellaneous functions you can affect the program run, e.g., a program interruption the machine functions, such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off the path behavior of the tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 273: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  In addition, programming with Q parameters enables you to measure with the 3-D touch probe during the program run. Further information: «Programming Q Parameters», page 365 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 274: Fundamentals Of Path Functions

  If the NC block contains two coordinates, the control moves the tool in the programmed plane. Example L X+70 Y+50 The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves on the XY plane to the position X=70, Y=50. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 275
  When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element, enter the direction of rotation as follows: Clockwise direction of rotation: DR- Counterclockwise direction of rotation: DR+ HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 276
  Creating the NC blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the dialog. The control asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the NC block into the part program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 277
  Press the F AUTO soft key. CALL MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M? Enter 3 (miscellaneous function e.g. M3) and terminate the dialog with the END key Example L X-20 Y+30 R0 FMAX M3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 278: Approaching And Departing A Contour

  If danger of collision exists, approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately. Example 30 L Z-10 R0 FMAX 31 L X+20 Y+30 RL F350 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 279
  Example in the figure on the right: If you set the end point in the dark gray area, the contour will be damaged when the contour is approached/departed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 280: Overview: Types Of Paths For Contour Approach And Departure

  The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour. You program helical approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 281: Important Positions For Approach And Departure

  There is danger of collision during the approach movement! Program a suitable pre-position Check the auxiliary point P , the sequence and the contour with the aid of the graphic simulation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 282
  If you program APPR LN or APPR CT with R0, the control stops the machining/simulation with an error message. This method of function differs from the iTNC 530 control! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 283: Approaching On A Straight Line With Tangential Connection: Appr Lt

  8 APPR LN X+10 Y+20 Z-10 LEN15 RR F100 PA with radius comp. RR 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 284: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Appr Ct

  8 APPR CT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 CCA180 R+10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, radius R=10 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 285: Approaching On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection From A Straight Line To The Contour: Appr Lct

  8 APPR LCT X+10 Y+20 Z-10 R10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR, radius R=10 9 L X+20 Y+35 End point of the first contour element 10 L … Next contour element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 286: Departing In A Straight Line With Tangential Connection: Dep Lt

  Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LN LEN+20 F100 Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN=20 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 287: Departing On A Circular Path With Tangential Connection: Dep Ct

  Last contour element: PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LCT X+10 Y+12 R+8 F100 Coordinates PN, arc radius=8 mm 25 L Z+100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z, return to block 1, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 288: Path Contours  Cartesian Coordinates

  Straight line or circular «Path contours – FK free programming path with any connection contour programming to the preceding contour (option 19)», page 307 element HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 289: Straight Line L

  Select the NC block after which you want to insert the straight line block Press the actual position capture key The control generates a straight-line block with the actual position coordinates. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 290: Inserting A Chamfer Between Two Straight Lines

  A feed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that CHF block. After the CHF block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 291: Rounded Corners Rnd

  A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that RND block. After the RND block, the previous feed rate becomes effective again. You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 292: Circle Center Cc

  The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center: The tool does not move to this position. The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 293: Circular Path C Around Circle Center Cc

  The maximum value for input tolerance is 0.016 mm. Set the input tolerance in the machine parameter circleDeviation (no. 200901). Smallest possible circle that the control can traverse: 0.016 mm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 294: Circle Cr With Defined Radius

  However, you can also program circular arcs that do not lie in the active working plane. By simultaneously rotating these circular movements you can create spatial arcs (arcs in three axes). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 295
  11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR- (arc 1) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R+20 DR+ (arc 2) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR- (arc 3) 11 CR X+70 Y+40 R-20 DR+ (arc 4) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 296: Circle Ct With Tangential Connection

  A tangential arc is a two-dimensional operation: the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 297: Example: Linear Movements And Chamfers With Cartesian Coordinates

  14 DEP LT LEN10 F1000 Depart the contour on a straight line with tangential connection 15 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 16 END PGM LINEAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 298: Example: Circular Movements With Cartesian Coordinates

  16 DEP LCT X-20 Y-20 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM CIRCULAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 299: Example: Full Circle With Cartesian Coordinates

  10 DEP LCT X-40 Y+50 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM C-CC MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 300: Path Contours — Polar Coordinates

  Combination of a circular and a Polar radius, polar angle of the linear movement arc end point, coordinate of the end point in the tool axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 301: Datum For Polar Coordinates: Pole Cc

  If the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise: PA<0 Example 12 CC X+45 Y+25 13 LP PR+30 PA+0 RR F300 M3 14 LP PA+60 15 LP IPA+60 16 LP PA+180 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 302: Circular Path Cp Around Pole Cc

  Example 12 CC X+40 Y+35 13 L X+0 Y+35 RL F250 M3 14 LP PR+25 PA+120 15 CTP PR+30 PA+30 16 L Y+0 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 303: Helix

  Internal thread Work direction Direction of rotation Radius compensation Right-hand DR– Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– Left-hand Z– External thread Right-hand DR– Left-hand DR– Right-hand Z– Left-hand Z– HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 304
  Example: Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 12 CC X+40 Y+25 13 L Z+0 F100 M3 14 LP PR+3 PA+270 RL F50 15 CP IPA-1800 IZ+5 DR- HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 305: Example: Linear Movement With Polar Coordinates

  15 DEP PLCT PR+60 PA+180 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 17 END PGM LINEARPO MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 306: Example: Helix

  10 DEP CT CCA180 R+2 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 12 END PGM HELIX MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 307: Path Contours — Fk Free Contour Programming (Option 19)

  FK programming graphics. The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 308
  NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach. Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL command. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 309: Fk Programming Graphics

  Showing block numbers in the graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window: Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR. soft key to SHOW (soft-key row 3) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 310: Initiating The Fk Dialog

  The control displays the axis soft keys of the active working plane. Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys The pole for FK programming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 311: Free Straight Line Programming

  To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key To initiate the dialog, press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 312: Free Circular Path Programming

  To display the soft keys for free contour programming, press the FK key To initiate the dialog, press the FCT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 313: Input Possibilities

  Adapt imported NC programs if required Example 27 FLT X+25 LEN 12.5 AN+35 RL F200 28 FC DR+ R6 LEN 10 AN-45 29 FCT DR- R15 LEN 15 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 314
  Rotational direction of the arc Radius of an arc Example 10 FC CCX+20 CCY+15 DR+ R15 11 FPOL X+20 Y+15 12 FL AN+40 13 FC DR+ R15 CCPR+35 CCPA+40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 315
  FK section. Beginning of CLSD+ contour: End of contour: CLSD– Example 12 L X+5 Y+35 RL F500 M3 13 FC DR- R15 CLSD+ CCX+20 CCY+35 17 FC DR- R+15 CLSD- HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 316: Auxiliary Points

  X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc Distance of auxiliary point to circu- lar arc Example 13 FC DR- R10 P1X+42.929 P1Y+60.071 14 FLT AN-70 PDX+50 PDY+53 D10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 317: Relative Data

  Polar coordinates relative to block N Example 12 FPOL X+10 Y+10 13 FL PR+20 PA+20 14 FL AN+45 15 FCT IX+20 DR- R20 CCA+90 RX 13 16 FL IPR+35 PA+0 RPR 13 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 318
  N Example 12 FL X+10 Y+10 RL 13 FL … 14 FL X+18 Y+35 15 FL … 16 FL … 17 FC DR- R10 CCA+0 ICCX+20 ICCY-15 RCCX12 RCCY14 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 319: Example: Fk Programming 1

  Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 16 L X-30 Y+0 R0 FMAX 17 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 18 END PGM FK1 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 320: Example: Fk Programming 2

  19 DEP LCT X+30 Y+30 R5 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM FK2 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 321: Example: Fk Programming 3

  23 RND R5 24 FL X+65 Y-25 AN-90 25 FC DR+ R50 CCX+65 CCY-75 26 FCT DR- R65 27 FSELECT 1 28 FCT Y+0 DR- R40 CCX+0 CCY+0 29 FSELECT 4 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 322
  Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 31 L X-70 R0 FMAX 32 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 33 END PGM FK3 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 323: Data Transfer From Cad Files

  Data Transfer from CAD Files…

• Page 324: Screen Layout Of The Cad Viewer

  The control displays the following file formats: File Type Format Step .STP and .STEP AP 203 AP 214 IGES .IGS and .IGES Version 5.3 .DXF R10 to 2015 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 325: Cad Import (Option 42)

  Further information: «File names», page 169 The control does not support binary DXF format. Save the DXF file in ASCII format in the CAD or drawing program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 326: Using The Cad Viewer

  Klartext program by copy and paste using the clipboard. If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

• Page 327: Basic Settings

  Shift key, and the active – symbol is the same as the pressed CTRL key. The active cursor symbol is the same as the mouse The following icons are displayed by the control only in certain modes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 328
  In addition, you must remove the comments that the CAD-Viewer inserts into the contour program. The control displays the active basic settings in the status bar of the screen. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 329: Setting Layers

  Alternatively, use the space key Show a layer: Select the layer with the left mouse button, and click its check box to show it Alternatively, use the space key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 330: Setting A Preset

  The control sets the preset symbol at the selected location. You can adjust the orientation of the coordinate system, if required. Further information: «Adjusting the orientation of the coordinate system», page 331 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 331
  In the Element Information window, the control shows how far the preset you have chosen is located from the drawing datum, and how this reference system is oriented with respect to the drawing. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 332: Defining The Datum

  The control sets the preset symbol at the selected location. You can adjust the orientation of the coordinate system, if required. Further information: «Adjusting the orientation of the coordinate system», page 333 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 333
  Left-click an element that is approximately in the positive Y direction The control aligns the Y and Z axes and displays them in green and blue in the list view. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 334
  Data Transfer from CAD Files | CAD import (option 42) Element information In the Element Information window, the control shows how far the datum you have chosen is located from the workpiece preset. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 335: Selecting And Saving A Contour

  Layer: Indicates the layer you are currently on Type: Indicates the current element type, e.g. line Coordinates: Shows the starting point and end point of an element, and circle center and radius where appropriate HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 336
  The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more contours, press the Cancel Selected Elements soft key and select the next contour as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 337
  If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a circular arc, then the control extends or shortens the contour element along the same arc. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 338: Selecting And Saving Machining Positions

  The point tables (.PNT) of the TNC 640 and iTNC 530 are not compatible. Transferring and processing on the other control type in each case may lead to problems and unforeseen performance. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 339
  The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 340
  The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 341
  The control saves the contour program to the selected directory. If you want to select more machining positions, press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 342
  Display the next larger diameter found Display the largest diameter found (default setting) You can have the tool paths displayed by clicking the SHOW TOOL PATH icon. Further information: «Basic settings», page 327 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 343
  To return to the standard display, press the shift key and simultaneously double-click with the right mouse button. The rotation angle is maintained if you only double-click with the right mouse button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 345: Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  Subprograms and Program Section Repeats…

• Page 346: Labeling Subprograms And Program Section Repeats

  Do not use a label number or label name more than once! Label 0 (LBL 0) is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 347: Subprograms

  Write subprograms after the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 in the part program, they will be executed at least once even if they are not called HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 348: Programming The Subprogram

  Ignore repeats REP by pressing the NO ENT key. Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL 0 is not permitted (Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 349: Program-Section Repeats

  The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats, because the first repeat starts after the first machining process. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 350: Programming A Program Section Repeat

  If you want to use a LABEL name, press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry Enter the number of repeats REP and confirm with the ENT key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 351: Any Desired Nc Program As Subprogram

  Select an NC program with SEL PGM Call the last selected file with CALL SELECTED Select any NC program with SEL CYCLE as a fixed cycle Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 352: Operating Sequence

  If the called NC program contains the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30, then the control displays a warning. The control automatically clears the warning as soon as you select another NC program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 353: Calling Any Program As A Subprogram

  As a rule, Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM CALL. So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program also influence the calling program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 354
  Enter the path name with the keyboard Press the SELECT FILE soft key The control shows a selection window that allows you to select the program to be called. Press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 355
  FN 18 function (ID10 NR110 and NR111) Further information: «FN 18: SYSREAD – Reading system data», page 392 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 356: Nesting

  Maximum nesting depth for subprograms: 19 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls: 19, where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 357: Subprogram Within A Subprogram

  45. End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS. 5 Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 358: Repeating Program Section Repeats

  (including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27). 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 359: Repeating A Subprogram

  This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice. 4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 up to block 19. Return jump to block 1 and end of program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 360: Programming Examples

  Return jump to LBL 1; section is repeated a total of 4 times 20 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program 21 END PGM PGMWDH MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 361: Example: Groups Of Holes

  Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 17 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 18 LBL 0 End of subprogram 1 19 END PGM UP1 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 362: Example: Group Of Holes With Several Tools

  New plunging depth for drilling 11 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern 12 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 13 TOOL CALL 3 Z S500 Reamer tool call HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 363
  Move to 3rd hole, call cycle 29 L IX-20 R0 FMAX M99 Move to 4th hole, call cycle 30 LBL 0 End of subprogram 2 31 END PGM SP2 MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 365: Programming Q Parameters

  Programming Q Parameters…

• Page 366: 10.1 Principle And Overview Of Functions

  0 to 99 Parameters for users 100 to 199 Parameters for HEIDENHAIN functions (e.g., cycles) 200 to 499 Parameters for the machine tool builder (e.g., cycles) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 367
  Only use Q parameter ranges recommended by HEIDENHAIN. Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. Check the machining sequence using a graphic simulation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 368: Programming Notes

  You can reset Q parameters to the status Undefined. If a position is programmed with a Q parameter that is undefined, the control ignores this movement. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 369: Calling Q Parameter Functions

  Then you define the parameter number. If you have a USB keyboard connected, you can press the Q key to open the dialog for entering a formula. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 370: Part Families-Q Parameters In Place Of Numerical Values

  Example: Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius: R = Q1 Cylinder height: H = Q2 Cylinder Z1: Q1 = +30 Q2 = +10 Cylinder Z2: Q1 = +10 Q2 = +50 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 371: Describing Contours With Mathematical Functions

  You can enter the following to the right of the = sign: Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 372: Programming Fundamental Operations

  FIRST VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter Q5 as the first value and confirm with the ENT key. SECOND VALUE / PARAMETER? Enter 7 as the second value and confirm with the ENT key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 373
  The FN 0 function also supports transfer of the value Undefined. If you wish to transfer the undefined Q parameter without FN 0, the control shows the error message Invalid value. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 374: 10.4 Angle Functions

  Calculate and assign an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite and adjacent sides or with the sine and cosine of the angle (0 < angle < 360°) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 375: 10.5 Calculation Of Circles

  (Y if spindle axis is Z) in parameter Q21, and the circle radius in parameter Q22. Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 376: 10.6 If-Then Decisions With Q Parameters

  Example: FN 9: IF+10 EQU+10 GOTO LBL1 Abbreviations used: Equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than GOTO Go to UNDEFINED Undefined DEFINED Defined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 377: Programming If-Then Decisions

  FN 12: IF LESS, JUMP e. g. FN 12: IF+Q5 LT+0 GOTO LBL «ANYNAME» If the first value or parameter is smaller than the second value or parameter, jump to specified label HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 378: 10.7 Checking And Changing Q Parameters

  If you want to check or edit local, global or string parameters, press the SHOW PARAMETERS Q QL QR QS soft key. The control then displays the specific parameter type. The functions previously described also apply. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 379
  The result of Q1 = COS 89.999 * 0.001 is shown by the control as +1.74532925e-08, whereby e-08 corresponds to the factor of 10 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 380: 10.8 Additional Functions

  Transfer up to eight values to the FN 37: EXPORTExport local Q parameters or QS parameters into a calling program FN 38: SEND Send information from the NC program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 381: Fn 14: Error: Displaying Error Messages

  1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 1016 Contradictory input 1017 CYCL incomplete 1018 Plane wrongly defined 1019 Wrong axis programmed 1020 Wrong rpm 1021 Radius comp. undefined HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 382
  Pocket too large: scrap axis 2 1054 Stud too small: scrap axis 1 1055 Stud too small: scrap axis 2 1056 Stud too large: rework axis 1 1057 Stud too large: rework axis 2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 383
  1089 Slot position 0 not allowed 1090 Enter an infeed not equal to 0 1091 Switchover of Q399 not allowed 1092 Tool not defined 1093 Tool number not permitted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 384
  Plunging type is not possible 1105 Plunge angle incorrectly defined 1106 Angular length is undefined 1107 Slot width is too large 1108 Scaling factors not equal 1109 Tool data inconsistent HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 385: Fn16: F-Print — Formatted Output Of Texts And Q Parameter Values

  Format for text variable QS Format for integer Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character Line break Q parameter value, right-aligned Q parameter value, left-aligned HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 386
  Outputs text only for Polish conversational language L_HUNGARIA Outputs text only for Hungarian conversa- tional language L_CHINESE Outputs text only for Chinese conversational language L_CHINESE_TRAD Outputs text only for Chinese (traditional) conversational language HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 387
  «MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY»; «DATE: %02d.%02d.%04d»,DAY,MONTH,YEAR4; «TIME: %02d:%02d:%02d»,HOUR,MIN,SEC; «NO. OF MEASURED VALUES: = 1»; «X1 = %9.3F», Q31; «Y1 = %9.3F», Q32; «Z1 = %9.3F», Q33; HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 388
  MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE: July 15, 2015 TIME: 8:56:34 AM NO. OF MEASURED VALUES : = 1 X1 = 149.360 Y1 = 25.509 Z1 = 37.000 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 389
  FN 18 (e.g., the number of the last touch probe cycle used). Further information: «FN 18: SYSREAD – Reading system data», page 392 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 390
  FN16-function with the following syntax: Input Function :’QS1′ Set the QS parameter with preceding colon and between single quotation marks :’QL3′.txt Specify additional file name extension for the target file if required HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 391
  Printer: as the name of the log file and then enter the corresponding file name. The control saves the file in the PRINTER: path until the file is printed. Example 96 FN 16: F-PRINT TNC:MASKEMASKE1.A/PRINTER:DRUCK1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 392: Fn 18: Sysread — Reading System Data

  This function eliminates relative file paths. QS parameter Is there a directory with the name QS(IDX)? number 0 = no, 1 = Yes Only absolute directory paths are possible. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 393
  Programmed cutting speed in turning opera- tion Spindle mode in turning mode: 0 = constant speed 1 = constant cutting speed Coolant status M7: 0 = inactive, 1 = active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 394
  Q parameter number for the result (touch probe cycles 30 to 33) Q parameter type for the result (touch probe cycles 30 to 33) 1 = Q, 2 = QL, 3 = QR HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 395
  TT: Breakage tolerance for radius, RBREAK Tool no. Maximum speed NMAX Tool no. Point angle TANGLE Tool no. LIFTOFF allowed (0 = No, 1 = Yes) Tool no. Wear tolerance for radius R2TOL HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 396
  2 = Z 6 = U 7 = V 8 = W Spindle speed S Oversize for tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Automatic TOOL CALL 0 = Yes, 1 = No HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 397
  13 = Unload external tool, 14 = Unload internal tool, 15 = Unload special tool Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 = Yes, 0 = No HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 398
  Active radius oversize 2 = with oversize 3 = with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 = without Active length oversize 2 = with oversize 3 = with HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 399
  Projects the angle specified in the QL parameter from the input coordinate system to the tool coordinate system. If IDX is omitted, the angle 0 is used for projection. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 400
  Read the current position in the active coordinate system Axis Current nominal position in the input system Read the current position in the active coordinate system, including offsets (handwheel, etc.) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 401
  System time in seconds that has elapsed since 01.01.1970, 00:00:00 (real time). System time in seconds that has elapsed since 01.01.1970, 00:00:00 (look-ahead calcu- lation). Read the processing time of the current NC program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 402
  January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 403
  00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: YYYY-MM-DD Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: YYYY-MM-DD HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 404
  00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (real time) Format: h:mm Formatting of: System time in seconds that have elapsed since 00:00:00 UTC on January 1, 1970 (look-ahead calculation) Format: h:mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 405
  3 = Working plane coordinate system WPL — GPS: Shift in the workpiece system 0 = Off, 1 = On GPS: Axis offset 0 = Off, 1 = On HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 406
  Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Feed rate for pre-positioning: FMAX_PROBE or FMAX_MACHINE Maximum measuring range Set-up clearance Spindle orientation possible 0=No, 1=Yes Angle of spindle orientation in degrees HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 407
  Coordinate / Readout of the measurement results in the axis form of coordinates / axis values in the input system from probing operations. Compensation: only length Oriented spindle stop HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 408
  NC error 12 = Continuation with the row in the pallet table in which the NC error arose 13 = Continuation with the next pallet HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 409
  Feed-rate limit for high speeds (MP_maxG1Feed) in mm/min Max. jerk at low speeds (MP_maxPathJerk) in m/s Max. jerk at high speeds (MP_maxPath- JerkHi) in m/s Tolerance at low speeds (MP_pathTolerance) in mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 410
  DCM: Maximum tolerance for linear axes in cal axis mm (MP_maxLinearTolerance) Index of physi- DCM: Maximum angle tolerance in [°] cal axis (MP_maxAngleTolerance) Index of physi- Tolerance monitoring for successive threads cal axis (MP_threadTolerance) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 411
  (MP_maxPathAccHi) Index of physi- Compensation of following error in the jerk cal axis phase (MP_IpcJerkFact) Index of physi- kv factor of the position controller in 1/s cal axis (MP_kvFactor) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 412
  0 = not locked, 1 = locked Number of the replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 at TOOL CALL Current tool age CUR.TIME PLC status HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 413
  X component of the Z direction Y component of the Z direction Z component of the Z direction X component of the X direction Y component of the X direction HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 414
  Programming Q Parameters | Additional functions Group Gruppen- Systemdaten- Index Description name nummerID nummer Z component of the X direction Type of angle definition: Angle 1 Angle 2 Angle 3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 415
  If the tool selected by these rules is locked, a replacement tool will be returned. –1: No tool with the specified name found in the tool table or all qualifying tools are locked. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 416
  0 = simulation 2-D graphics during programming active? 1 = yes 0 = no Generate graphics during programming (soft key AUTO DRAW) active? 1 = yes 0 = no HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 417
  0 = no 1 = yes M101 active (visible condition)? 0 = no 1 = yes M136 active? 0 = no 1 = yes HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 418
  FOR SYNC. Input no. PLC input Output no. PLC output Counter no. PLC counter Timer no. PLC timer Byte no. PLC byte Word no. PLC word Double-word PLC double word HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 419
  TS probe type from TYPE column of the touch probe table (tchprobe.tp) Type of TT tool touch probe from CfgTT/type. Key name of the active tool touch probe TT from CfgProbes/activeTT. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 420
  Read data of the current tool (system string) 10950 Current tool name. Example: Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25. 55 FN 18: SYSREAD Q25 = ID210 NR4 IDX3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 421: Fn 19: Plc — Transfer Values To The Plc

  Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. The FN 19: PLC function transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 422: Fn 20: Wait For — Nc And Plc Synchronization

  NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block. Example: Pause internal look-ahead calculation, read current position in the X axis 32 FN 20: WAIT FOR SYNC 33 FN 18: SYSREAD Q1 = ID270 NR1 IDX1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 423: Fn 29: Plc — Transfer Values To The Plc

  Comply with the documentation from HEIDENHAIN, the machine tool builder, and suppliers. The FN 29: PLC function transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 424: Fn 37: Export

  For more detailed information, consult the Remo Tools SDK manual. Example Document values from Q1 and Q23 in the log. FN 38: SEND /»Q parameter Q1: %f Q23: %f» / +Q1 / +Q23 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 425: 10.9 Accessing Tables With Sql Commands

  The saver is based on a transaction model. A transaction is made up of multiples steps that are executed together, thereby ensuring an orderly and defined processing of the table entries. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 426: Overview Of Functions

  Q parameters to the table SQL INSERT creates a new table row SQL SELECT reads out a single values from a table and does not open any transaction HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 427: Programming Sql Commands

  If this value is then use in an inch program for the purpose of positioning (L X+Q1800), then an incorrect position will be the result. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 428: Application Example

  1 faulty read operation The HANDLE QL1 syntax is the transaction designated by the QL1 parameter The value is copied from the so-called result set (intermediate memory) to the bound parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 429: Sql Bind

  Database: column name: define table name and table column (separate with . ) Table name: synonym or path with filename of the table Column name: name displayed in the table editor HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 430: Sql Execute

  20 SQL Q5 «SELECT Meas_No,Meas_X,Meas_Y, Meas_Z FROM Tab_Example WHERE Meas_No<20» Example: selection of table rows with the WHERE function and Q parameters . . . 20 SQL Q5 «SELECT Meas_No,Meas_X,Meas_Y, Meas_Z FROM Tab_Example WHERE Meas_No==:’Q11’» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 431
  Less than or equal to <= Greater than > Greater than or equal to >= empty IS NULL Not empty IS NOT NULL Linking multiple conditions: Logical AND Logical OR HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 432
  9 SQL Q1800 «ALTER TABLE my_table ADD (WMAT2)» Insert table rows 9 SQL Q1800 «ALTER TABLE my_table DROP (WMAT2)» Delete table rows 9 SQL Q1800 «RENAME COLUMN my_table (WMAT2) TO Rename table column (WMAT3)» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 433: Sql Fetch

  Program the Q parameter containing the index The row (n=0) is read if nothing is specified The optional syntax elements IGNORE UNBOUND and UNDEFINE MISSING are intended for the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 434: Sql Update

  Database: Index for SQL result: Row number within the result set Program the row number directly Program the Q parameter containing the index The row (n=0) is assigned a value if none is specified HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 435: Sql Insert

  Parameter No. for result (return value for the control): 0 successful transaction 1 successful transaction Database: SQL access ID: Define Q parameters for the HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 436: Sql Commit

  Parameter No. for result (return value for the control): 0 successful transaction 1 successful transaction Database: SQL access ID: Define Q parameters for the HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 437: Sql Rollback

  HANDLE (for identifying the transaction) Database: Index to SQL result: Row that remains in the result set Program the row number directly Program the Q parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 438: Sql Select

  «Application example», page 428 Example 0 BEGIN PGM SQL MM 1 SQL SELECT QS1800 «SELECT WMAT FROM my_table Read and save a value WHERE NO==3» 2 END PGM SQL MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 439: Entering Formulas Directly

  Q10 = ASIN 0.75 Arc cosine Inverse function of the cosine; determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse e.g., Q11 = ACOS Q40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 440
  When return value Q12 = 1, then Q50 > 0 When return value Q12 = -1, then Q50 < 0 Calculate modulo value (division remainder) e.g., Q12 = 400 % 360 result: Q12 = 40 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 441: Rules For Formulas

  2 Calculation step 3 to the third power = 27 3 Calculation 100 – 27 = 73 Distributive law Law of distribution with parentheses calculation a * (b + c) = a * b + a * c HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 442: Example Of Entry

  OPENING PARENTHESIS soft key Enter 12 (Q parameter number) Select division Enter 13 (Q parameter number) Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example 37 Q25 = ATAN (Q12/Q13) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 443: String Parameters

  When you use the STRING FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string. When you use the FORMULA function, the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 444: Assign String Parameters

  Press the SPEC FCT key Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the STRING FUNCTIONS soft key Press the DECLARE STRING soft key Example 37 DECLARE STRING QS10 = «Workpiece» HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 445: Chain-Linking String Parameters

  Example: QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12, QS13 and QS14 37 QS10 = QS12 || QS13 || QS14 Parameter contents: QS12: Workpiece QS13: Status: QS14: Scrap QS10: Workpiece Status: Scrap HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 446: Converting A Numerical Value To A String Parameter

  END key Example: Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11, use 3 decimal places 37 QS11 = TOCHAR ( DAT+Q50 DECIMALS3 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 447: Copying A Substring From A String Parameter

  The first character of a text string starts internally at the 0-position Example: A four-character substring (LEN4) is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character (BEG2) 37 QS13 = SUBSTR ( SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 448: Reading System Data

  Path of the selected pallet table NC software version, 10630 Version identifier of the NC software version Tool data, 10950 Tool name DOC entry of the tool Tool-carrier kinematics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 449: Converting A String Parameter To A Numerical Value

  Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example: Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 37 Q82 = TONUMB ( SRC_QS11 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 450: Testing A String Parameter

  Example: Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13. Begin the search at the third place. 37 Q50 = INSTR ( SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 451: Finding The Length Of A String Parameter

  END key Example: Find the length of QS15 37 Q52 = STRLEN ( SRC_QS15 ) If the selected string parameter is not defined the control returns the result -1. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 452: Comparing Alphabetic Priority

  +1: The first QS parameter follows the second QS parameter alphabetically Example: QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority 37 Q52 = STRCOMP ( SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 453: Reading Out Machine Parameters

  KEY_QS: Group name (key) of the machine parameter TAG_QS: Object name (entity) of the machine parameter ATR_QS: Name (attribute) of the machine parameter IDX: Index of the machine parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 454
  Assign string parameter for key 15 QS12 = «CfgDisplaydata» Assign string parameter for entity 16 QS13 = «axisDisplay» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 QS1 = Read out machine parameter CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 IDX3 ) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 455
  Assign string parameter for key 15 QS12 = «CfgGeoCycle» Assign string parameter for entity 16 QS13 = «pocketOverlap» Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 Q50 = CFGREAD( KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 ) Read out machine parameter HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 456: 10.12 Preassigned Q Parameters

  Tool radius R (tool table or TOOL DEF block) Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block The control remembers the current tool radius even if the power is interrupted. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 457: Tool Axis: Q109

  Dimensional data of the main program Parameter value Metric system (mm) Q113 = 0 Imperial system (inch) Q113 = 1 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 458: Tool Length: Q114

  Tilting the working plane with spatial (workpiece) angles instead of spindle head angles: Coordinates for rotary axes calculated by the control. Coordinates Parameter value A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis Q122 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 459: Measurement Results From Touch Probe Cycles

  Parameter value Rotation about the A axis Q170 Rotation about the B axis Q171 Rotation about the C axis Q172 Workpiece status Parameter value Good Q180 Rework Q181 Scrap Q182 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 460
  Status of tool measurement with TT Parameter value Tool within tolerance Q199 = 0.0 Tool is worn (LTOL/RTOL is exceeded) Q199 = 1.0 Tool is broken (LBREAK/RBREAK is exceed- Q199 = 2.0 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 461: Programming Examples

  22 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 23 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Account for rotational position in the plane 24 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+Q8 25 Q35 = (Q6 -Q5) / Q7 Calculate angle increment HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 462
  43 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 44 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 45 L Z+Q12 R0 FMAX Move to set-up clearance 46 LBL 0 End of subprogram 47 END PGM ELLIPSE MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 463: Example: Concave Cylinder Machined With Spherical Cutter

  Call machining operation 18 FN 0: Q10 = +0 Reset allowance 19 CALL LBL 10 Call machining operation 20 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 464
  Reset the datum shift 50 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 51 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 52 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 53 LBL 0 End of subprogram 54 END PGM CYLIN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 465: Example: Convex Sphere Machined With End Mill

  Account for allowance in the sphere radius 28 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center of sphere 29 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+Q1 30 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+Q2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 466
  Reset the datum shift 55 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0 56 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0 57 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z+0 58 LBL 0 End of subprogram 59 END PGM SPHERE MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 467: Miscellaneous Functions

  Miscellaneous Functions…

• Page 468: Entering Miscellaneous Functions M And Stop

  In this case, the dialog is continued for the parameter input. In the Manual operation and Electronic handwheel operating modes, the M functions are entered with the M soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 469
  M (miscellaneous) function in a STOP block: To program an interruption of program run, press the STOP key Enter a miscellaneous function M Example 87 STOP M6 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 470: Miscellaneous Functions For Program Run Inspection, Spindle And Coolant

  ■ Tool change Spindle STOP Program STOP ■ Coolant ON ■ Coolant OFF ■ Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON ■ Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON ■ Same as M2 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 471: Miscellaneous Functions For Coordinate Entries

  The coordinate values on the control screen reference the machine datum. Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF . Further information: «Status displays», page 94 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 472
  Further information: «Showing the workpiece blank in the working space (option 20)», page 710 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 473: Moving To Positions In A Non-Tilted Coordinate System With A Tilted Working Plane: M130

  If the M130 function is combined with a cycle call, the control will interrupt the execution with an error message. Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight-line blocks without tool radius compensation. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 474: Miscellaneous Functions For Path Behavior

  15 L IX+100 … Move to contour point 15 16 L IY+0.5 … R… F… M97 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 17 L X… Y… Move to contour point 17 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 475: Machining Open Contour Corners: M98

  M98 becomes effective at the end of the block. Example: Move to the contour points 10, 11 and 12 in succession 10 L X… Y… RL F 11 L X… IY… M98 12 L IX+ … HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 476: Feed Rate Factor For Plunging Movements: M103

  Actual contouring feed rate (mm/min): 17 L X+20 Y+20 RL F500 M103 F20 18 L Y+50 19 L IZ-2.5 20 L IY+5 IZ-5 21 L IX+50 22 L Z+5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 477: Feed Rate In Millimeters Per Spindle Revolution: M136

  If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override, the control changes the feed rate accordingly. Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of the block. You can cancel M136 by programming M137. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 478: Feed Rate For Circular Arcs: M109/M110/M111

  The initial state is restored after finishing or canceling a machining cycle. Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of the block. M109 and M110 can be canceled with M111. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 479: Calculating The Radius-Compensated Path In Advance (Look Ahead): M120 (Miscellaneous Functions Software Option)

  PGM CALL the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or with the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 480
  Before using the functions listed below, you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation: Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 19 Working plane PLANE function M114 M128 TCPM FUNCTION HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 481: Superimposing Handwheel Positioning During Program Run: M118 (Software Option Miscellaneous Functions)

  The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard. Effect To cancel handwheel positioning, program M118 once again without coordinate input. M118 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 482
  For this purpose, program at least the spindle axis with its permitted range of traverse in the M118 function (e.g. M118 Z5) and select the VT axis on the handwheel. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 483: Retraction From The Contour In The Tool-Axis Direction: M140

  Effect M140 is effective only in the NC block in which itis programmed. M140 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 484
  There is a danger of collision during these compensating movements! Do not combine M118 with M140 when using machines with head rotation axes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 485: Suppressing Touch Probe Monitoring: M141

  M141 functions only for movements with straight-line blocks. Effect M141 is effective only in the NC block in which M141 is programmed. M141 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 486: Deleting Basic Rotation: M143

  M143 becomes effective at the start of the block. M143 deletes the entries in columns SPA, SPB, and SPC in the preset table; reactivating the corresponding preset table line does not activate the deleted basic rotation. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 487: Automatically Retracting The Tool From The Contour At An Nc Stop: M148

  When a power interruption occurs Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149. M148 becomes effective at the start of the block, M149 at the end of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 488: Rounding Corners: M197

  Effect The M197 function acts blockwise and is only effective on outside corners. Example L X… Y… RL M197 DL0.876 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 489: Special Functions

  Special Functions…

• Page 490: 12.1 Overview Of Special Functions

  You can rapidly navigate with the cursor or mouse and select functions in the tree diagram. The control displays online help for the selected function in the window on the right. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 491: Program Defaults Menu

  Define a complex contour See Cycle- formula Programming User’s Manual Define regular machining pattern See Cycle- Programming User’s Manual Select the point file with machin- See Cycle- ing positions Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 492: Menu For Defining Different Conversional Functions

  Define recurring dwell time page 526 Define dwell time in seconds or page 528 revolutions Lift off tool at NC stop page 529 Add comments page 201 Choose path interpretation page 588 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 493: 12.2 Tool Carrier Management

  The tool carrier templates may consist of several sub- files. If the sub-files are incomplete, the control will display an error message. Do not use incomplete tool carrier templates! HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 494: Assigning Input Parameters To Tool Carriers

  If the tool carrier template does not contain any transformation vectors, names, test points and measurement points, the additional ToolHolderWizard tool does not execute any function when the corresponding icons are activated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 495
  Output file area Press the GENERATE FILE button If required, reply to the message on the control Press the CLOSE icon The control closes the additional tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 496
  Output file area Press the GENERATE FILE button If required, reply to the message on the control Press the CLOSE icon The control closes the additional tool HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 497: Allocating Parameterized Tool Carriers

  Select the desired tool carrier using the preview screen Press the OK soft key The control copies the name of the selected tool carrier to the KINEMATIC column Exit the tool table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 498: Active Chatter Control Acc (Option 145)

  ACC is also advantageous during standard roughing. When you use the ACC feature, you must enter the number of tool cuts CUT for the corresponding tool in the TOOL.T tool table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 499: Activating/Deactivating Acc

  Further information: «Status displays», page 94 To deactivate ACC: Set the soft key to OFF If ACC is active, the control shows the icon in the position display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 500: Working With The Parallel Axes U, V And W

  You must deactivate the parallel-axis functions before switching the machine kinematics. You can deactivate the programming of parallel axes with the machine parameter noParaxMode (no. 105413). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 501: Function Paraxcomp Display

  Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Select the FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY function Define the parallel axis whose movements the control is to take into account in the position display of the associated principal axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 502: Function Paraxcomp Move

  (no. 300203). Your machine tool builder can also activate the PARAXCOMP functions permanently using a machine parameter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 503: Deactivating Function Paraxcomp

  Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF. If you want to switch off the parallel-axis functions only for individual parallel axes, then the respective axis must be specifically indicated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 504: Function Paraxmode

  & character. The axis with the & character then refers to the principal axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 505
  Your machine tool builder will define the calculation of possible offset values (X_OFFS, Y_OFFS and Z_OFFS from the preset table) for the axes positioned with the operator in the presetToAlignAxis machine parameter & (no. 300203). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 506: Deactivating Function Paraxmode

  Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Select FUNCTION PARAX Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 507: Example: Drilling With The W Axis

  10 FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF Restore standard axis configuration 11 L Z+0 W+0 R0 FMAX M91 Reset the principal axis and minor axis 12 L M30 13 END PGM PAR MM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 508: 12.5 File Functions

  If you try to copy a file that does not exist, the control generates an error message. FILE DELETE does not generate an error message if you try to delete a non-existing file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 509: 12.6 Defining Coordinate Transformations

  Incremental values always refer to the datum which was last valid (this may be a datum which has already been shifted). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 510: Trans Datum Table

  DATUM TABLE block, then the control uses the datum table previously selected with SEL TABLE or the datum table activated in the Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence operating mode (status M). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 511: Trans Datum Reset

  Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Select transformations Select the TRANS DATUM datum shift Press the RESET DATUM SHIFT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 512: 12.7 Defining A Counter

  If necessary, note down the counter value and enter it again via the MOD menu after execution. You can use Cycle 225 to engrave the current counter value into the workpiece. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 513: Define Function Count

  51 FUNCTION COUNT INC Increment the counter value 52 FUNCTION COUNT REPEAT LBL 11 Repeat the machining operations if more parts are to be machined. 53 M30 54 END PGM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 514: 12.8 Creating Text Files

  Move cursor one word to the right Move cursor one word to the left Go to next screen page Go to previous screen page Cursor at beginning of file Cursor at end of file HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 515: Editing Texts

  Soft key Function Delete and temporarily store a line Delete and temporarily store a word Delete and temporarily store a character Insert a line or word from temporary storage HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 516: Editing Text Blocks

  Press the READ FILE soft key. The control displays the File name = dialog message. Enter the path and name of the file you want to insert HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 517: Finding Text Sections

  Find text : dialog prompt Enter the text that you wish to find To find text: press the FIND soft key. Exit the search function: Press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 518: 12.9 Freely Definable Tables

  TNC:systemproto directory. Then your template will also be available in the list box for table templates when you create a new table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 519: Editing The Table Format

  Navigation using the control’s keyboard: Press the navigation keys to go to the entry fields. Use the arrow keys to navigate within an entry field. To open pop-down menus, press the GOTO key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 520: Switching Between Table And Form View

  This moves the cursor to the left window, and you can select the desired line with the arrow keys. Press the green navigation key to switch back to the input window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 521: Fn 26: Tabopen — Open A Freely Definable Table

  The table to be opened must have the extension .TAB. Example: Open the table TAB1.TAB, which is saved in the directory TNC:DIR1. 56 FN 26: TABOPEN TNC:DIR1TAB1.TAB HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 522: Fn 27: Tabwrite — Write To A Freely Definable Table

  Q parameters Q5, Q6 and Q7 . 53 Q5 = 3.75 54 Q6 = -5 55 Q7 = 7.5 56 FN 27: TABWRITE 5/»RADIUS,DEPTH,D» = Q5 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 523: Fn 28: Tabread — Read From A Freely Definable Table

  The names of tables and table columns must start with a letter and must not contain an arithmetic operator (e.g., +). Due to SQL commands, these characters can cause problems when inputting data or reading it out. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 524: Pulsing Spindle Speed Function S-Pulse

  S-PULSE FUNCTION falls below the maximum speed once more. Symbols In the status bar the symbol indicates the condition of the pulsing shaft speed: Icon Function Pulsing spindle speed active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 525: Resetting The Pulsing Spindle Speed

  Proceed as follows for the definition: Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION SPINDLE soft key Press the RESET SPINDLE-PULSE soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 526: 12.11 Dwell Time Function Feed

  Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION FEED soft key Press the FEED DWELL soft key Define the interval duration for dwelling D-TIME Define the interval duration for cutting F-TIME HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 527: Resetting Dwell Time

  Press the RESET FEED DWELL soft key You can also reset the dwell time by entering D-TIME 0. The control automatically resets the FUNCTION FEED DWELL function at the end of a program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 528: 12.12 Dwell Time Function Dwell

  Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key FUNCTION DWELL soft key Press the DWELL TIME soft key Define the duration in seconds Alternatively, press the DWELL REVOLUTIONS soft key Define the number of spindle revolutions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 529: Lift Off Tool At Nc Stop: Function Liftoff

  Lift-off in the tool axis direction with M148 Further information: «Automatically retracting the tool from the contour at an NC stop: M148», page 487 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 530
  Show the soft-key row with special functions Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key Press the FUNCTION LIFTOFF soft key Press the LIFTOFF ANGLE TCS soft key Enter the SPB angle HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 531: Resetting The Lift-Off Function

  Press the FUNCTION LIFTOFF soft key Press the LIFTOFF RESET soft key You can also reset the lift-off with M149. The control automatically resets the FUNCTION LIFTOFF function at the end of a program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 533: Multiple-Axis Machining

  Multiple-Axis- Machining…

• Page 534: 13.1 Functions For Multiple Axis Machining

  Reduce display value of rotary axes M128 Define the behavior of the control when positioning the rotary axes M138 Selection of tilted axes M144 Calculate machine kinematics LN blocks Three-dimensional tool compensation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 535: The Plane Function: Tilting The Working Plane (Option

  The mirrored rotary axis has no effect on the tilt specified in the PLANE function used, because only the movement of the rotary axis is mirrored HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 536
  0. The control only supports tilting the working plane with spindle axis Z. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 537: Overview

  PLANE function. While the animation plays, the control highlights the soft key of the selected PLANE function with a blue color. Soft key Function Switch on the animation mode Select the desired animation (highlighted in blue) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 538: Defining The Plane Function

  In the Distance-To-Go display (ACTDST and REFDST) the control shows, during tilting (MOVE or TURN mode) in the rotary axis, the distance to go to the calculated final position of the rotary axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 539: Resetting Plane Function

  It does not need to be defined more than once. Deactivate tilting in the Manual operation operating mode in the 3D ROT menu. Further information: «Activating manual tilting:», page 690 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 540: Defining The Working Plane With The Spatial Angle: Plane Spatial

  The result is identical for both perspectives, as the following comparison shows. Example PLANE SPATIAL SPA+45 SPB+0 SPC+90 … A-B-C C-B-A Home position A0° B0° C0° Home position A0° B0° C0° A+45° C+90° B+0° B+0° C+90° A+45° HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 541
  Spatial angle C?: Rotational angle SPC about the (non-tilted) Z axis. Input range from -359.9999 to +359.9999 Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 542: Defining The Working Plane With The Projection Angle: Plane Projected

  You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 543
  «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 Example 5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR+24 PROMIN+24 ROT+30 ..Abbreviations used: PROJECTED Projected PROPR Principal plane PROMIN Minor plane Rotation HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 544: Defining The Working Plane With The Euler Angle: Plane Euler

  The 0° axis is the X axis Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 Example 5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 ..HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 545
  X axis shift- ed by the precession angle EULROT Rotation angle: angle describing the rotation of the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 546: Defining The Working Plane With Two Vectors: Plane Vector

  This behavior is independent of the configuration of the machine parameters. You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 547
  If the normal vector has no X component, the base vector corresponds to the original X axis If the normal vector has no Y component, the base vector corresponds to the original Y axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 548
  5 PLANE VECTOR BX0.8 BY-0.4 BZ-0.42 NX0.2 NY0.2 NZ0.92 .. Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning VECTOR Vector BX, BY, BZ Base vector : X, Y, and components NX, NY, NZ Normal vector : X, Y, and components HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 549: Defining The Working Plane Via Three Points: Plane Points

  Point 1 and Point 2 (right-hand rule). You can select the desired positioning behavior. Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 550
  «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 Example 5 PLANE POINTS P1X+0 P1Y+0 P1Z+20 P2X+30 P2Y+31 P2Z+20 P3X+0 P3Y+41 P3Z+32.5 ..Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning POINTS Points HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 551: Defining The Working Plane Via A Single Incremental Spatial Angle: Plane Relativ

  Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 Example 5 PLANE RELATIV SPB-45 ..Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning RELATIVE Relative to HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 552: Tilting The Working Plane Through Axis Angle: Plane Axial

  The SEQ, TABLE ROT and COORD ROT functions have no effect in conjunction with PLANE AXIAL. The PLANE AXIAL function does not take basic rotation into account. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 553
  Input range: –99999.9999° to +99999.9999° Continue with the positioning properties Further information: «Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function», page 554 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning AXIAL In the axial direction HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 554: Specifying The Positioning Behavior Of The Plane Function

  The mirrored rotary axis has no effect on the tilt specified in the PLANE function used, because only the movement of the rotary axis is mirrored HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 555
  FAUTO (feed rate from the TOOL CALL block). If you use PLANE together with STAY, you have to position the rotary axes in a separate block after the PLANE function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 556
  MB MAX positions the tool just before the software limit switch. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 557
  Define and activate the PLANE function 14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 F2000 Position the rotary axis with the values calculated by the control. Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 558
  3 If only one solution is within the traverse range, the control selects this solution 4 If neither solution is within the traverse range, the control displays the Entered angle not permitted error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 559
  If no free rotary axis is created in a tilting situation, the COORD ROT and TABLE ROT transformation types have no effect With the PLANE AXIAL function the COORD ROT and TABLE ROT transformation types have no effect HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 560
  If no transformation type was specified, the control uses the COORD ROT transformation type for the PLANE functions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 561
  B axis before tilting the working plane is maintained Because the workpiece was not positioned, the control aligns the working plane coordinate system according to the programmed spatial angle SPB+20 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 562: Tilting The Working Plane Without Rotary Axes

  TOOL CALL 5 Z S4500 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-90 SPC+0 STAY The tilt angle must be precisely adapted to the tool angle, otherwise the control will generate an error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 563: Inclined-Tool Machining In A Tilted Plane (Option 9)

  13 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB-45 SPC+0 MOVE DIST50 Define and activate the PLANE function F1000 14 M128 Activate M128 15 L IB-17 F1000 Set the incline angle Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 564: Inclined-Tool Machining Via Normal Vectors

  14 M128 Activate M128 15 LN X+31.737 Y+21.954 Z+33.165 NX+0.3 NY+0 NZ Set the incline angle with the normal vector +0.9539 F1000 M3 Define machining in the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 565: 13.4 Miscellaneous Functions For Rotary Axes

  M116 is effective in the working plane. Reset M116 with M117. At the end of the program, M116 is automatically canceled. M116 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 566: Shortest-Path Traverse Of Rotary Axes: M126

  10° +20° 10° 340° –30° Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of the block. To cancel M126, enter M127. At the end of program, M126 is automatically canceled. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 567: Reducing Display Of A Rotary Axis To A Value Less Than 360°: M94

  C axis to the programmed value L C+180 FMAX M94 Effect M94 is effective only in the NC block where it is programmed. M94 becomes effective at the start of the block. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 568: Maintaining The Position Of The Tool Tip When Positioning With Tilted Axes (Tcpm): M128 (Option 9)

  M128. The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip. If M128 is active, the control shows the TCPM symbol in the status display HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 569
  Enter M129 to cancel M128. The control will also cancel M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode. Example: Feed rate of 1000 mm/min for compensation movements L X+0 Y+38.5 IB-15 RL F125 M128 F1000 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 570
  HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 571: Selecting Tilting Axes: M138

  M138 becomes effective at the start of the block. You can cancel M138 by reprogramming it without specifying any axes. Example Perform the above-mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C. L Z+100 R0 FMAX M138 C HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 572: Compensating The Machine Kinematics In Actual/Nominal Positions At End Of Block: M144 (Option 9)

  M144 becomes effective at the start of the block. M144 does not work in connection with M128 or the Tilt Working Plane function. You can cancel M144 by programming M145. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 573: Function Tcpm (Option 9)

  NC program for possible contour damages. Defining FUNCTION TCPM Select the special functions Select the programming aids Select FUNCTION TCPM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 574: Mode Of Action Of The Programmed Feed Rate

  13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP … Feed rate refers to the tool tip 14 FUNCTION TCPM F CONT … Feed rate is interpreted as the speed of the tool along the contour HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 575: Interpretation Of The Programmed Rotary Axis Coordinates

  Rotary axis coordinates are spatial angles 20 L A+0 B+45 C+0 F MAX Set tool orientation to B+45 degrees (spatial angle). Define space angle A and C with 0 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 576: Type Of Interpolation Between The Starting And End Position

  13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT PATHCTRL AXIS Tool tip moves along a straight line 14 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL VECTOR Tool tip and tool directional vector move in one plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 577: Selection Of Tool Reference Point And Center Of Rotation

  (simultaneous turning). The use of this function only makes sense for control in turning mode (Option 50). Currently, this software option is only supported on the TNC 640. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 578: Resetting Function Tcpm

  When you select a new NC program in the Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence operating modes, the control automatically cancels the TCPM function. Example 25 FUNCTION RESET TCPM Reset FUNCTION TCPM HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 579: Three-Dimensional Tool Compensation (Option 9)

  (3D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation). Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 580: Suppressing Error Messages With Positive Tool Oversize: M107

  > 0 Prog Behavior with M107 With M107 the control suppresses the error message. Effect M107 takes effect at the end of block. You can reset M107 with M108. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 581: Definition Of A Normalized Vector

  You can suppress the error message with the M107 function. The control will not warn you if there is a danger of contour damage due to tool oversizes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 582: Permissible Tool Shapes

  R2 + DR2 + DR2 = End mill Prog 0 < R2 + DR2 + DR2 < R: Toroid cutter Prog R2 + DR2 + DR2 = R: Radius cutter Prog HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 583: 3-D Compensation Without Tcpm

  NZ-0.8764339 F1000 M3 Straight line with 3-D compensation X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 584: Face Milling: 3D Compensation With Tcpm

  Program a safe tool position before the tilting movement, if necessary. Carefully test the NC program or program section in the Program run, single block operating mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 585
  Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point NX, NY, NZ: Components of the surface-normal vector TX, TY, TZ: Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 586: Peripheral Milling: 3-D Radius Compensation With Tcpm And Radius Compensation (Rl/Rr)

  There are two ways to define the tool orientation: In an LN block with the components TX, TY and TZ In an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 587
  Straight line X, Y, Z: Compensated coordinates of the straight-line end point B, C: Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orien- tation Radius Compensation Feed rate Miscellaneous function HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 588: Interpretation Of The Programmed Path

  DR2 for 3-D radius compensation. If you activate FUNCTION PROG PATH, the interpretation of the programmed path as the contour is effective for 3-D compensation movements until you deactivate the function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 589: 13.7 Running Cam Programs

  The basis for this is the real-time operating system HeROS 5 in conjunction with the ADP (Advanced Dynamic Prediction) function of the TNC 620. This enables the control to also efficiently process NC programs with high point densities. From 3-D model to NC program…

• Page 590: Consider With Post Processor Configuration

  Avoid the output of the feed rate in every NC block. This would negatively influence the control’s velocity profile HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 591
  3 Q52 = 1350 ; FEED RATE FOR MILLING 25 L Z+250 R0 FMAX 26 L X+235 Y-25 FQ50 27 L Z+35 28 L Z+33.2571 FQ51 29 L X+321.7562 Y-24.9573 Z+33.3978 FQ52 30 L X+320.8251 Y-24.4338 Z+33.8311 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 592: Please Note The Following For Cam Programming

  Normal tolerance in Cycle 32: Between 0.010 mm and 0.020 mm Normal chord error in the CAM system: Smaller than 0.005 mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 593
  L and permissible contour tolerance TA: T ~ K x L x TA K = 0.0175 [1/°] Example: L = 10 mm, TA = 0.1°: T = 0.0175 mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 594: Possibilities For Intervention On The Control

  Tuning. Cycle 332 can be used to modify filter settings, acceleration settings, and jerk settings. Example 34 CYCL DEF 32.0 TOLERANCE 35 CYCL DEF 32.1 T0.05 36 CYCL DEF 32.2 HSC MODE:1 TA3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 595: Adp Motion Control

  Improved reaction to negative effects (e.g. short, step-like stages, coarse chord tolerances, heavily rounded block end- point coordinates) in NC programs generated by CAM system Precise compliance to dynamic characteristics even in difficult conditions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 597: Pallet Management

  Pallet Management…

• Page 598: Pallet Management (Option Number 22)

  Without a pallet changer you can use pallet tables to process NC programs with different presets in sequence with just one press of NC Start. The file name of a pallet table must always begin with a letter. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 599
  Number of the pallet preset Optional field This entry is only required if pallet presets are used. W-STATUS Execution status Optional field This entry is only required for tool- oriented machining. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 600
  Insert as last line in the table Delete the last line in the table Add several lines at end of table Copy the current value Insert the copied value Select beginning of line HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 601
  Select end of line Find text or value Sort or hide table columns Edit the current field Sort by column contents Miscellaneous functions, e.g. saving Open file path selection HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 602: Selecting Pallet Table

  Using the arrow keys, select the desired column. Press the INSERT COLUMN soft key Press the ENT key You can remove the column with the DELETE COLUMN soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 603: Processing Pallet Table

  Scroll through the NC program with the arrow keys Press the END PGM PAL soft key The control returns to the pallet table. A machine parameter defines how the control is to react after an error. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 604
  If you interrupt the processing of pallet tables, the control always suggests the previously selected NC block of the interrupted NC program for the BLOCK SCAN function. Further information: «Block scan in pallet programs», page 732 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 605: 14.2 Pallet Preset Management

  If necessary, check the active pallet preset in the PAL tab Check the traverse movements of the machine Use pallet presets only in conjunction with pallets HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 606: 14.3 Tool-Oriented Machining

  Changing the machine statuses with a miscellaneous function (e.g. M13) Writing to the configuration (e.g. WRITE KINEMATICS) Traverse range switchover Cycle 32 Tolerance Tilting the working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 607
  SP-B, SP-C, You can enter safety positions for the axes. The SP-U, SP-V, control only approaches these positions if the SP-W machine tool builder processes them in the NC macros. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 608: Sequence Of Tool-Oriented Machining

  If you want to start machining again, change the W-STATUS to BLANK. If you change the status in the PAL line, all FIX and PGM lines below this line are automatically changed, too. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 609: Mid-Program Startup With Block Scan

  Changing the machine statuses with a miscellaneous function (e.g. M13) Writing to the configuration (e.g. WRITE KINEMATICS) Traverse range switchover Cycle 32 Tolerance Tilting the working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 611: Batch Process Manager

  Batch Process Manager…

• Page 612: Batch Process Manager (Option 154)

  Times at which manual interventions in the machine are required The tool usage test function has to be enabled and switched on to ensure you get all information! Further information: «Tool usage test», page 254 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 613
  Pallet, Fixture or Program is locked Pallet or Fixture is not enabled for machin- This line is currently being processed in Program run, single block or Program run, full sequence and cannot be edited HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 614
  Edit opened job list Collapse or expand tree structure INSERT REMOVE Shows the soft keys INSERT BEFORE, INSERT AFTER and REMOVE Insert a new Pallet, Fixture or Program before the cursor position HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 615: Opening The Batch Process Manager

  In the pallet management Further information: «Pallet Management», page 597 The control opens the pallet table (.p) in the Batch Process Manager as a job list. Directly in the Batch Process Manager HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 616
  Locked: Lock the selected line Editing possible: The selected line cannot be edited Confirm your entries by pressing the ENT key. Repeat the steps if required Press the EDIT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 617: Editing A Job List

  The following entries can be changed: Name Datum table Preset Locked Editing possible Confirm the edited entries by pressing the ENT key. The control adopts the changes. Press the EDIT soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 618: Executing The Job List

  You can execute the job list using the pallet management Further information: «Processing pallet table», page 603 The control opens the job list as a pallet table in the pallet management (.p). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 619: Manual Operation And Setup

  Manual Operation and Setup…

• Page 620: 16.1 Switch-On, Switch-Off

  The control carries out a self-test. If the control does not register an error, it displays the Traverse reference points dialog. If the control registers an error, it issues an error message. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 621
  Only confirm the pop-up window with YES if the axis positions match Despite confirmation, at first only move the axis carefully If there are discrepancies or you have any doubts, contact your machine tool builder HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 622: Traverse Reference Points

  Press and hold the axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed The control is now ready for operation in the Manual operation mode. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 623
  If the machine does not have any absolute encoders, the position of the rotary axes must be confirmed. The position shown in the pop-up window is the last position before the control was switched off. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 624: Switch-Off

  Always shut down the control Only turn off the main switch after being prompted on the screen HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 625: 16.2 Moving The Machine Axes

  «Spindle speed S, feed rate F and miscellaneous function M», page 637 If a moving task is active on the machine, the control displays the control in operation symbol. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 626: Incremental Jog Positioning

  If you are in the Jog increment menu, you can switch off incremental jog positioning with the SWITCH OFF soft key. The input range for the infeed is from 0.001 mm to 10 mm. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 627: Traverse With Electronic Handwheels

  An active handwheel must be deactivated before another handwheel can be selected. Refer to your machine manual. This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 628
  NC STOP key (machine-dependent function, key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer) Handwheel Spindle speed potentiometer Feed rate potentiometer Cable connection, not available with the HR 550FS wireless handwheel HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 629
  STEP ON or OFF: Incremental jog active or inactive. If the function is active, the control additionally displays the current traversing step Soft-key row: Selection of various functions, described in the following sections HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 630
  If this happens you must reduce the distance to the handwheel holder in which the radio receiver is integrated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 631
  To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press END The MOD operating mode includes a function for commissioning and configuring the handwheel. Further information: «Configuring the HR 550FS wireless handwheel», page 770 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 632
  Move the active axis in the negative direction with the — key To deactivate the handwheel, press the handwheel key on the HR 5xx Now you can operate the control via the operating panel again. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 633
  Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel The control issues a warning if the handwheel potentiometers are still active after the handwheel has been deactivated. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 634
  10. By also pressing the CTRL key, you can increase the counting increment by a factor of 100 when pressing F1 or F2. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 635
  NC block after which the new traversing block is to be inserted Activate the handwheel Press the Generate NC block key on the handwheel The control inserts a complete traversing block containing all axis positions selected through the MOD function. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 636
  Further information: «Returning to the contour», page 733 On/off switch for the Tilt working plane function (handwheel soft keys MOP and then 3D) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 637: Spindle Speed S, Feed Rate F And Miscellaneous Function M

  When 3D ROT is active the machining feed rate is shown if several axes are moved If 3D ROT is not active, the feed drive display remains empty if several axes are moved HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 638: Adjusting Spindle Speed And Feed Rate

  To activate the feed rate limit F MAX, proceed as follows: Operating mode: Press the Positioning w/ Manual Data Input key Press the F MAX soft key Enter the desired maximum feed rate Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 639: Optional Safety Concept (Functional Safety Fs)

  In this chapter you will find explanations of the functions that are additionally available on a control with functional safety. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 640: Explanation Of Terms

  Safe operating stop. Provides protection against unexpected start of the drives Safely-limited speed. Prevents the drives from exceeding the specified speed limits when the protective door is opened HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 641: Additional Status Displays

  Icon Safety-related operating mode SOM_1 operating mode active SOM_2 operating mode active SOM_3 mode active SOM_4 mode active HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 642: Checking The Axis Positions

  If necessary, move to a safe position before approaching the test positions Watch out for possible collisions Refer to your machine manual. The location of the test position is specified by your machine tool builder. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 643: Activating Feed-Rate Limitation

  SOM_1 is active, the axes and spindles are brought to a stop, because only then will you be allowed to open the guard doors in SOM_1. Select the Manual operation mode Shift the soft-key row Switch on/off feed rate limit HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 644: 16.5 Managing Presets

  Never change the number of rows in the copied tables! If you want to reactivate the table, this may lead to problems. To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the TNC:table directory HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 645
  If the preset set manually is active, the control displays the text PR MAN(0) in the status display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 646
  (the row number is the preset number) If needed, select the column in the preset table that you want to change Use the soft keys to select one of the available entry possibilities HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 647
  If inch display is active: Enter the value in inches, and the control will internally convert the entered values to mm HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 648
  (2nd soft-key row) Insert a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft- key row) Delete a single line at the end of the table (2nd soft-key row) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 649: Protecting Presets From Being Overwritten

  Press the LOCK / UNLOCK PASSWORD soft key Enter the password in the pop-up window Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key: The control writes ### in the LOCKED column. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 650
  Press the LOCK / UNLOCK PASSWORD soft key Enter the password in the pop-up window Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key The control rescinds the write-protection. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 651: Activating A Preset

  Use Cycle 247 in order to activate presets from the preset table during program run. In Cycle 247 you define the number of the preset to be activated. Further information: Cycle Programming User’s Manual HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 652: 16.6 Presetting Without A 3-D Touch Probe

  If the tool in the tool axis has already been set, set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z=L+d. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 653: Using Touch Probe Functions With Mechanical Probes Or Measuring Dials

  If you try to set a preset in a locked axis, the control will issue either a warning or an error message, depending on what the machine tool builder has defined. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 654: Using A 3-D Touch Probe (Option 17)

  Always set a preset in all three principal axes. This clearly and correctly defines the preset. That way you also taken into account possible deviations resulting from the tilting of the axes. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 655: Overview

  Setting the centerline as preset Touch probe system data See Cycle Program- management ming User’s Manual For more information about the touch probe table, refer to the User’s Manual for Cycle Programming HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 656
  The control closes the pop-up window. Probe the second touch point If necessary, set the preset End the probing function If the handwheel is active you cannot start the probing cycles. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 657: Suppress Touch Probe Monitoring

  Probe hole (inside circle) automatically Probe stud (outside circle) automatically Probe a model circle (center point of several elements) Select a paraxial probing direction for probing of holes, studs and model circles HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 658
  Number of touch Number of probing operations (3 to points? Angular length? Probing a full circle (360°) or a circle segment (angular length<360°) Automatic probing routine: Pre-position touch probe HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 659
  Take the starting angle of the first probing process into account in pre-positioning; for example, at a starting angle of 0° the control will first probe in the positive direction of the reference axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 660: Selecting The Probing Cycle

  FN16DefaultPath (no. 102202), the control will store the TCHPRMAN.html file in the TNC: main directory. Operating notes: If you run several touch probes cycles in a row, the control stores the measured values below each other. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 661: Writing Measured Values From The Touch Probe Cycles To A Datum Table

  Enter the datum number in the Number in table? input field Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The control saves the datum in the indicated datum table under the entered number. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 662: Writing Measured Values From The Touch-Probe Cycles To The Preset Table

  ENTRY IN LOCKED LINE soft key and enter the password to overwrite the active preset The control displays a note if a table row cannot be written to because of disabling. The probing function itself is not interrupted. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 663: Calibrating 3-D Touch Probes (Option 17)

  Measure the radius and the center offset using a stud or a calibration pin Measure the radius and the center offset using a calibration sphere HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 664: Calibrating The Effective Length

  Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect Press the CANCEL soft key to terminate the calibrating function. The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 665: Calibrating The Effective Radius And Compensating Center Misalignment

  180°, and then executes another probing routine. The center offset (CAL_OF in tchprobe.tp) is determined in addition to the radius by probing from opposite orientations. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 666
  The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. Refer to your machine manual. In order to be able to determine ball-tip center misalignment, the control needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 667
  The control logs the calibration process in the TCHPRMAN.html file. Refer to your machine manual. In order to be able to determine ball-tip center misalignment, the control needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 668: Displaying Calibration Values

  This is regardless of whether you want to use a touch-probe cycle in automatic mode or Manual operation mode. For more information about the touch probe table, refer to the User’s Manual for Cycle Programming HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 669: Compensating Workpiece Misalignment With 3-D Touch Probe (Option 17)

  SET BASIC ROTATION or SET TABLE ROTATION soft key. The behavior of the control during presetting depends on the setting in the machine parameter chkTiltingAxes (no. 204601). Further information: «Introduction», page 654 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 670: Identifying Basic Rotation

  Press the BASIC ROT. IN PRESET TABLE soft key If appropriate, the control opens the Overwrite active preset? menu. Press the OVERWRITE PRESET soft key The control saves the basic rotation in the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 671: Compensation Of Workpiece Misalignment By Rotating The Table

  The control deletes the basic rotation from the preset table, and inserts the offset. Or press KEEP BASIC ROT. The control inserts the offset in the preset table, and the basic rotation also remains. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 672: Show Basic Rotation And Offset

  Or enter Offset of rotary table: 0 Apply with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Or apply with the SET TABLE ROTATION soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 673: Measuring 3-D Basic Rotation

  2nd point is on the reference axis, in a positive direction from the first point 3rd point is on the minor axis, in a positive direction of the desired workpiece coordinate system HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 674
  Press the BASIC ROT. IN PRESET TABLE soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key The control saves the 3-D basic rotation in the columns SPA, SPB, and SPC of the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 675
  Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING PL soft key Enter 0 for all angles Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 676: Presetting With A 3-D Touch Probe (Option Number 17)

  With an active datum shift the determined value is with respect to the current preset (possibly a manual preset from the Manual operation mode). The datum shift is included in the position display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 677: Presetting On Any Axis

  661 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 662 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 678: Corner As Preset

  661 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 662 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 679
  If you activate the offset, the control automatically writes the positions and the offset or only the positions to the preset table. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 680: Circle Center As Preset

  The control needs at least three touch points to calculate outside or inside circles, e.g. with circle segments. More precise results are obtained with four touch points. If possible, always pre-position the touch probe to the center. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 681
  To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key Once the probing routine is completed, the control displays the current coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 682
  661 Further information: «Writing measured values from the touch-probe cycles to the preset table», page 662 To terminate the probe function, press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 683: Setting A Center Line As Preset

  This way you can determine the positions once, and then store them in the principal axis as well as in the secondary axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 684: Measuring Workpieces With A 3-D Touch Probe

  Finding the coordinates of a corner point on the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point. Further information: «Corner as preset», page 678 The control displays the coordinates of the probed corner as preset. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 685
  You can measure The angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge; or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of max. 90°. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 686
  PA between the workpiece edges as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation, or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 687: Tilting The Working Plane (Option

  (option 8)», page 535 The control functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transformations. The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 688
  (3-D tool length compensation). The control only supports the Tilt working plane function in combination with the spindle axis Z. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 689: Position Display In A Tilted System

  Limitations on working with the tilting function The Actual-position capture function is not allowed if the Tilt working plane function is active PLC positioning (determined by the machine tool builder) is not possible. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 690: Activating Manual Tilting

  Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or the PLANE function in the machining program, the angle values defined there are in effect. Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 691
  Tilt working plane menu. Even if the 3D-ROT dialog in the Manual operation mode is set to Active, resetting the tilting (PLANE RESET) with an active basic transformation still functions correctly. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 692: Setting The Tool-Axis Direction As The Active Machining Direction

  The behavior of the control during presetting depends on the setting in the optional machine parameter chkTiltingAxes (no. 204601): Further information: «Introduction», page 654 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 693: Positioning With Manual Data Input

  Positioning with Manual Data Input…

• Page 694: Programming And Executing Simple Machining Operations

  Editing an NC block Modifying Q parameter values with the Q INFO soft key Switching the operating modes Restore the contextual reference via repetition of the required NC blocks HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 695: Positioning With Manual Data Input (Mdi)

  165 You can control and modify Q parameters with the soft keys Q PARAMETER LIST and Q INFO. Further information: «Checking and changing Q parameters», page 378 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 696
  Call the DRILLING cycle 6 L Z+200 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool 7 END PGM $MDI MM End of program Straight-line function: Further information: «Straight line L», page 289 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 697: Protecting Programs In $Mdi

  $MDI file, e.g.Hole Press the OK soft key. To exit the file manager, press the END soft key Further information: «Copying a single file», page 176 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 699: Test Run And Program Run

  Test Run and Program Run…

• Page 700: Graphics (Option 20)

  MOD menu Graphic settings you and decrease the Model quality and in that way increase the speed of simulation. If you are using a TNC 620 with touch control, you can replace some keystrokes with hand-to-screen contact. Further information: «Operating the Touchscreen»,…

• Page 701: Speed Of The Setting Test Runs

  You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program: Select the function for setting the simulation speed Select the desired function by soft key, e.g. incrementally increasing the simulation speed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 702: Overview: Display Modes

  The high-resolution 3-D view enables you to display the surface of the machined workpiece in greater detail. Using a simulated light source, the control creates realistic light and shadow conditions. Press the 3-D view soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 703
  To return to the standard display: Press the shift key and simultaneously double-click with the right mouse key. The rotation angle is maintained if you only double-click with the right mouse key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 704
  Activate measuring If measuring is activated, the control shows the corresponding coordinates in close proxim- ity if you position the mouse cursor on the 3-D graphics of the workpiece. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 705
  A powerful zoom function is available in order for you to quickly recognize the details for the displayed tool paths. The control displays traverse movements in rapid traverse in red. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 706: Plan View

  Select projection in three planes in the operating modes Program run, single block and Program run, full sequence: Press the GRAPHICS soft key Press the View on 3 Planes soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 707
  The sectional plan is automatically reset when the control is restarted. You can also move the sectional plane to its default position manually: Press the soft key for resetting the sectional planes soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 708: Repeating Graphic Simulation

  Function Program run, full sequence / Program run, single block Test Run The control displays the tool in various colors: Red: Tool is in effect Blue: Tool is retracted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 709: Measurement Of Machining Time

  Select the desired function via soft key, e.g.,saving the displayed time Soft key Stopwatch functions Store displayed time Display the sum of stored time and displayed time Clear displayed time HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 710: Showing The Workpiece Blank In The Working Space (Option 20)

  Display the current traverse range This shows the traverse ranges config- ured by the machine tool builder and can be selected accordingly. Switch monitoring function on or off Display machine reference point HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 711
  With BLK FORM CYLINDER, a cuboid is depicted as the workpiece blank in the working space With BLK FORM ROTATION , no workpiece blanks is depicted in the working space HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 712: Functions For Program Display

  NC program in pages: Soft key Functions Go back one screen in the NC program Go forward one screen in the NC — program Select start of program Select end of program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 713: Test Run

  Test the NC program at the later machining position (BLANK IN WORK SPACE) Program a safe intermediate position after the tool change and before prepositioning Carefully test the NC program in the Program run, single block operating mode HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 714
  Test Run operating mode. This macro will simulate the exact behavior of the machine. In doing so, the machine tool builder often changes the simulated tool change position. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 715: Test Run Execution

  In order to continue the test, the following actions must not be performed: Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program Selecting a new program HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 716: Test Run Up To A Certain Block

  Modification before the interruption point: The simulation restarts at the beginning Modification after the interruption point: Positioning at the interruption point is possible with GOTO HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 717: Program Run

  Starting the program run from a certain block Optional block skip Edit the tool table TOOL.T Checking and changing Q parameters Superimpose handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 718: Running A Part Program

  Program Run, Full Sequence Start the machining program with the NC Start key Program Run, Single Block Start each block of the machining program individually with the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 719: Interrupting, Stopping Or Aborting Machining

  Change setting for the optional programmed interruption with Change setting for the programmed skipping of NC blocks with During major errors, the control automatically aborts the program run (e.g., during a cycle call with stationary spindle). HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 720
  Refer to your machine manual. The miscellaneous function M6 may also lead to a suspension of the program run. The machine manufacturer sets the functional scope of the miscellaneous functions. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 721
  The control shows the symbol for the exited inactive status in the status display Actions such as a change of operating mode are available again HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 722: Moving The Machine Axes During An Interruption

  On some machines you may have to press the NC start key after the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key to enable the axis direction keys. Refer to your machine manual. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 723: Resuming Program Run After An Interruption

  With an erasable error message: Remove the cause of the error Clear the error message from the screen: Press the CE key Restart the program, or resume program run where it was interrupted HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 724: Retraction After A Power Interruption

  The control selects the mode of traverse and the associated parameters automatically. If the traverse mode or the parameters have not been correctly preselected, you are unable to reset them manually. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 725
  Right-handed thread: the main spindle turns clockwise when moving into the workpiece, counter-clockwise when retracting from it; left-handed thread: main spindle turns counter-clockwise when moving into the workpiece and clockwise when retracting from it HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 726
  YES soft key. The control hides Retraction selectedmode. Initialize the machine: if required, cross the reference points Establish the desired machine condition: If required, reset the tilted working plane HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 727: Entering The Program At Any Point: Mid-Program Startup

  The BLOCK SCAN function must not be used in conjunction with the following functions: Active stretch filter Touch probe cycles 0, 1, 3, and 4 during the search phase of mid-program startup HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 728
  After an internal stop, you would like to start in block 12 in the third machining operation of LBL 1. In the pop-up window enter the following data: Start-up at: N =12 Repetitions = 3 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 729
  Mid-program startup to the next start-up point: Press the CONTINUE BLOCK SCAN soft key Enter the NC block where you wish to start If you changed the machine status: Press the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 730
  Repetitions = 1 Press the NC start key until the control runs the NC block The control continues to run the subprogram and then returns to the main program. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 731
  Enter the desired point number in the Point number = input field. The first point in the point pattern has the point number 0. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 732
  Press the ADVANCED soft key if required The control expands the pop-up window. Press the SELECT LAST BLOCK soft key to select the last saved interruption Press the NC Start key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 733: Returning To The Contour

  Repeat the process for all axes If the tool is located in the tool axis below the starting point, then the control offers the tool axis as the first traverse direction. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 734: 18.6 Automatic Program Start

  Time (hrs:min:sec): Time of day at which the program is to be started Date (DD.MM.YYYY): Date on which the program is to be started To activate the start, press the OK HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 735: Skipping Blocks

  Press the INSERT soft key Delete / symbol In the Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be erased Press the REMOVE soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 736: 18.8 Optional Program-Run Interruption

  Do not interrupt Program run or Test Run with blocks containing M1: Set the soft key to OFF Interrupt Program run or Test Run with blocks containing M1: Set the soft key to ON HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 737: Mod Functions

  MOD Functions…

• Page 738: Mod Function

  END key. Exiting MOD functions Exit the MOD functions: Press the END soft key or the END key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 739: Overview Of Mod Functions

  System settings Set the system time Define the network connection Network: IP configuration Diagnostic functions Bus diagnosis Diagnosis of Drives HEROS information General information Version information License information Machine times HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 740: Graphic Settings

  High High data transfer rate, exact depiction of tool geometry Medium Medium data transfer rate, approximation of tool geometry Low data transfer rate, coarse approximation of tool geometry HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 741: Counter Settings

  You can change the Counter settings via soft key as follows: Soft key Meaning Reset count Increase count Lower count You can also enter the values directly with a connected mouse. Further information: «Defining a counter», page 512 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 742: Machine Settings

  Proceed as follows to restrict external access: In the MOD menu, select the Machine settings group Select the External access menu Set the EXTERNAL ACCESS ON/OFF soft key to OFF Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 743
  Never Deny continuously Deny once In the overview list, an active connection is shown with a green symbol. Connections without access rights are shown gray in the overview list. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 744: Entering Traverse Limits

  The settings are kept even after the control has been restarted. You can only deactivate the protection zone by deleting all values or pressing the EMPTY EVERYTHING soft key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 745: Tool Usage File

  MOD function. When you select a kinematics model for the test run this does not affect machine kinematics. Ensure that you have selected the correct kinematics in the Test Run operating mode for checking your workpiece. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 746: System Settings

  Press the NTP off soft key in order to select the Synchronize the time over NTP server entry Enter hostnames or the URL of an TNP server Press the Add soft key Press the OK soft key HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 747: 19.6 Select The Position Display

  REF ACTL Reference position; actual position relative to the machine datum REF NOML Reference position; nominal position relative to the machine datum Servo lag; difference between nominal and actual positions HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 748
  With the MOD function Position display 1, you can select the position display in the status display. With the MOD function Position display 2, you can select the position display in the additional status display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 749: 19.7 Setting The Unit Of Measure

  Program run Duration of controlled operation since being put into service Refer to your machine manual. The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 750: Software Numbers

  The control requires a code number for the following functions: Function Code number Select user parameters Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enabling special functions for Q parameter 555343 programming HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 751: 19.11 Setting Up Data Interfaces

  Open the RS232 folder. The control then displays the following settings: Set BAUD RATE (baud rate no. 106701) You can set the BAUD RATE (data transfer speed) from 110 to 115 200 baud. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 752: Set Protocol (Protocol No. 106702)

  Set stop bits (stopBits no. 106705) The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize each transmitted character during serial data transmission. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 753: Set Handshake (Flowcontrol No. 106706)

  With the state of the RTS line (optional), you can define whether the LOW level is active in idle state. TRUE: Level is LOW in idle state FALSE: Level is not LOW in idle state HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 754: Define Behavior After Receipt Of Etx (Noeotafteretx No. 106710)

  Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake: RTS_CTS File system for file operations HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 755: Setting The Operating Mode Of The External Device (Filesystem)

  Starting TNCremo under Windows Click on <Start>, <Programs>, <HEIDENHAIN Applications>, <TNCremo> When you start TNCremo for the first time, it automatically tries to set up a connection with the control. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 756
  Further information: «Available tool types», page 266 End TNCremo Select <File>, <Exit> You can open the context-sensitive help function of the TNCremo software by pressing the F1 key. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 757: Ethernet Interface

  Only active if a second, optional Ethernet interface is avail- able on the control hardware Computer Name displayed for the control in your compa- name ny network HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 758
  Only activate this function if the optionally available second Ethernet interface should be accessed externally for diagnostic purposes via the control. Only do so after instruction by our Service Department HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 759
  Option Manually configure the default gateway: Manually enter the IP addresses of the default gateway Apply the changes with the OK button, or discard them with the Cancel button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 760
  Ask your network specialist for the proper value Group ID: Definition of the group identification with which you access files in the network. Ask your network specialist for the proper value HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 761
  IP address in the machine network. You can also select settings for these devices. Advanced options button: Additional settings for the DNS/DHCP server. Set stan- dard values button: Set factory settings. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 762
  Status log Display of status information and error messages. Press the Clear button to delete the contents of the Status Log window. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 763: 19.13 Firewall

  Set the Active option to enable the firewall Press the Set standard values button to activate the default settings recommended by HEIDENHAIN. Exit the dialog with the OK button. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 764
  TeleService programs from HEIDENHAIN (e.g. screenshot). If this service is blocked, the VNC configuration dialog shows a warning from HEROS that VNC is disabled in the firewall. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 765
  IP address for a host name in the firewall. Advanced options These settings are only intended for your network specialists Set standard Resets the settings to the default values values recommended by HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 766: 19.14 Set Up Touch Probes

  Remove the battery from the touch probe Insert the battery into the touch probe The control connects to the touch probe and creates a new row in the table HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 767: Setting Up A Touch Probe In The Mod Dialog

  The control creates a new row in the table. If necessary, highlight the row with the cursor Enter the touch probe data on the right side The control immediately saves the entered data in the machine parameters. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 768: Touch Probe With Radio Transmission Configuration

  You only need to change the signal strength if there is interference. Select the strength of the radio signal You only need to change the signal strength if there is interference. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 769
  Stylus deflected or not deflected Collision Collision or no collision recognized Battery status Display of the battery quality If the charge is less than the displayed bar, then the control outputs a warning. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 770: Configuring The Hr 550Fs Wireless Handwheel

  Connect HR button To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 771: Setting The Transmission Channel

  Click on the Set power button The control displays the three available power settings. Click on the desired setting. To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu, press the END button HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 772: Statistical Data

  If this occurs, try to improve the transmission quality by selecting another channel or by increasing the transmitter power. Further information: «Setting the transmission channel», page 771 Further information: «Selecting the transmitter power», page 771 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 773: 19.16 Load Machine Configuration

  Select the backup file in the control’s file manager (e.g., BKUP-2013-12-12_.zip) The control opens the pop-up window for the backup. Press Emergency Stop Press the OK soft key to start the backup process HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 775: Tables And Overviews

  Tables and Overviews…

• Page 776: 20.1 Machine-Specific User Parameters

  Proceed as follows in order to have the actual system names of the parameters be shown: Press the Screen layout key Press the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 777
  As well as the Help text, other information is displayed, e.g. unit of measurement, initial value, selection list. If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the previous control model, the corresponding MP number is displayed. HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 778
  M5: Display spindle position if spindle is in position control and with M5 Show or hide soft key preset table True: Soft key preset table is not displayed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 779
  Program input in HEIDENHAIN Klartext conversational text or in DIN/ISO HEIDENHAIN: Program input in operating mode MDI in Klartext conversational text dialog ISO: Program input in Positioning with MDI mode of operation in DIN/ISO HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 780
  CHINESE CHINESE_TRAD SLOVENIAN KOREAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH PLC dialog language See NC dialog language PLC error message language See NC dialog language Help language See NC dialog language HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 781
  ON: With new BLK form in the test run, the tool paths are reset OFF: With new BLK form in the test run, the tool paths are not reset HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 782
  Setting the coordinate systems for the display Coordinate system for the datum shift WorkplaneSystem: Datum is displayed in the system of the tilted plane, WPL-CS WorkpieceSystem: Datum is displayed in the workpiece coordinate system, W-CS HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 783
  Maximum permissible measuring error with tool measurement 0.001 to 0.999 [mm]: Second maximum permissible measuring error NC stop during tool check True: NC program is stopped if breakage tolerance is exceeded HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 784
  0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around stylus for pre-positioning 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]: Safety clearance in plane perpendicular to tool axis HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 785
  Approach behavior on a slot wall in a cylindrical surface LineNormal: Approach with straight line CircleTangential: Approach with an arc movement M function for spindle orientation in machining cycles -1: Spindle orientation directly via NC HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 786
  Advanced switching time of spindle –999999999 to 999999999: The spindle is stopped at this time before reaching the bottom of the thread HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 787
  TRUE: For small thread depths the spindles speed is limited to the extent that for about 1/3 of the time it runs at a constant speed FALSE: No limitation of the spindle speed HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 788
  TRUE: Paraxial positioning blocks permitted FALSE: Paraxial positioning blocks locked Line number up to which identical syntax elements are searched for 500 to 50000: Search for selected elements with up/down arrow keys HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 789
  FN 16 output path for Programming and Test Run operating modes Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program Serial Interface RS232 Further information: «Setting up data interfaces», page 751 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 790: Connector Pin Layout And Connection Cables For Data Interfaces

  Yellow Green Green Brown Brown Signal GND Blue Gray Gray Pink Pink Do not Violet assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 791
  Signal GND Black Black Violet Violet Gray Gray White/ White/ Green Green Do not Green Green assign Hsg. External Hsg. External Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. Hsg. External Hsg. shield shield shield HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 792: Non-Heidenhain Devices

  Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length: Unshielded: 100 m Shielded: 400 m Signal Description Transmit Data TX– Transmit Data REC+ Receive Data Vacant Vacant REC– Receive Data Vacant Vacant HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 793: Technical Information

  5 x USB (1 x front USB 2.0; 4 x rear USB 3.0) ■ Ambient temperature Operation: 5 °C to +45 °C ■ Storage: –35 °C to +65 °C HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 794
  Any text string in quotation marks (“”) Number of program section repeats REP 1 to 65 534 (5, 0) Error number in Q parameter function FN14 0 to 1199 (4, 0) HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 795: User Functions

  Via straight line: tangential or perpendicular the contour ■ Via circular arc Free contourprogramming FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format (FK) with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 796
  Graphical simulation before a program run, also while another program is being run Display modes Plan view / projection in 3 planes / 3-D view / 3-D line graphics Detail enlargement HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 797
  Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece-specific datums Touch probe cycles Calibrating the touch probe Compensation of workpiece misalignment, manual or automatic Presetting, manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement Tools can be measured automatically HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 798: Software Options

  Communication with external PC applications over COM component Advanced Programming Features (option 19) Expanded programming functions FK free contour programming: Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 799
  Simple and convenient specification of presets Selecting graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs KinematicsOpt (option 48) Optimizing the machine kinematics Backup/restore active kinematics Test active kinematics Optimize active kinematics HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 800
  Active Vibration Damping – AVD (option 46) Active vibration damping Damping of machine oscillations to improve the workpiece surface Batch Process Manager (option 154) Batch process manager Planning of production orders HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 801: Accessories

  TS 740: High-precision 3-D touch trigger probe with infrared transmis- sion ■ TT 160: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement ■ TT 460: 3-D touch trigger probe for tool measurement with infrared transmission HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 802: Overview Tables

  BORING ■ UNIVERSAL DRILLING ■ BACK BORING ■ UNIVERSAL PECKING ■ TAPPING ■ RIGID TAPPING ■ BORE MILLING ■ TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG ■ POLAR PATTERN ■ CARTESIAN PATTERN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 803
  POLYGON STUD ■ THREAD MILLING ■ THREAD MLLNG/CNTSNKG ■ THREAD DRILLNG/MLLNG ■ HEL. THREAD DRLG/MLG ■ OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG ■ CONTOUR TRAIN DATA ■ TROCHOIDAL SLOT ■ THREE-D CONT. TRAIN HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 804: Miscellaneous Functions

  M126 Shorter-path traverse of rotary axes ■ Reset M126 M127 ■ M128 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes (TCPM) ■ M129 Reset M128 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 805
  NOMINAL positions at end of block ■ M145 Reset M144 ■ M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring ■ M148 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop ■ Reset M148 M149 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…

• Page 806: Functions Of The Tnc 620 And The Itnc 530 Compared

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 20.5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Specifications Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Control loops Maximum 8 control 18 maximum loops (including up to…

• Page 807: Comparison: Pc Software

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: PC software Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 ConfigDesign for the configuration of Available Not available machine parameters TNCanalyzer for the analysis and evaluation Available Not available…

• Page 808
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 X, with option 21…
• Page 809
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Constant contouring speed relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool’s cutting edge Parallel operation: Creating programs while another…
• Page 810
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Q parameter programming: Standard mathematical functions Formula entry String processing Local Q parameters QL Nonvolatile Q parameters QR Changing parameters during program interruption FN15:PRINT –…
• Page 811
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Graphic support 2-D programming graphics REDRAW function (REDRAW) – Show grid lines as the background – 3-D line graphics Test graphics (plan view, projection on 3 planes, 3-D…
• Page 812
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Datum tables: Storing workpiece-specific datums Preset table Preset management Line 0 of the preset table can be edited manually – Pallet management…
• Page 813
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 CAM support: Loading of contours from DXF data X, option 42 X, option 42 Load contours from Step data and Iges data X, option 42 –…
• Page 814
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Status displays: Positions, spindle speed, feed rate Larger depiction of position display, Manual operation Additional status display, form view Display of the handwheel path during machining with…

• Page 815: Comparison: Miscellaneous Functions

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Miscellaneous functions Effect TNC 620 iTNC 530 Program STOP/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Stop program/Spindle STOP/Coolant OFF/ Clear status display (depending on machine parameter)/Return jump to block 1…

• Page 816
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Effect TNC 620 iTNC 530 M112 Enter contour transitions between any two contour transi- – (recommended: tions Cycle 32) M113 Reset M112 M114 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when –…

• Page 817: Comparator: Cycles

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparator: Cycles Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 1 PECKING (recommended: Cycle 200, 203, 205) – 2 TAPPING (recommended: Cycle 206, 207 , 208) – 3 SLOT MILLING (recommended: Cycle 253) –…

• Page 818
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING X, option 19 206 TAPPING 207 RIGID TAPPING 208 BORE MILLING X, option 19 209 TAPPING W/ CHIP BRKG X, option 19 210 SLOT RECIP.

• Page 819: Comparison: Touch Probe Cycles In The Manual Operation And Electronic Handwheel Modes Of Operation

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Touch probe cycles in the Manual operation and Electronic handwheel modes of operation Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 Touch-probe table for managing 3-D touch probes –…

• Page 820: Comparison: Probing System Cycles For Automatic Workpiece Control

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Probing system cycles for automatic workpiece control Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 0 REF. PLANE X, option 17 1 POLAR PRESET X, option 17 2 CALIBRATE TS –…

• Page 821
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 iTNC 530 430 MEAS. BOLT HOLE CIRC X, option 17 431 MEASURE PLANE X, option 17 440 MEASURE AXIS SHIFT – 441 FAST PROBING…

• Page 822: Comparison: Differences In Programming

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in programming Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Switching the operating mode while Permitted Permitted a block is being edited File handling: Save file function…

• Page 823
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Datum table: Sorting function by values within Available Not available an axis Resetting the table Available Not available Hiding axes that are not present…
• Page 824
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Handling of error messages: Call via ERR key Call via HELP key Help with error messages Switching the operating mode Help menu is closed when the…

• Page 825: Comparison: Differences In Test Run, Functionality

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Programming minor axes: Syntax FUNCTION PARAXCOMP: Available Not available Define the behavior of the display and the paths of traverse Syntax FUNCTION PARAXMODE:…

• Page 826: Comparison: Differences In Test Run, Operation

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Test Run, operation Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Arrangement of soft-key rows and Arrangement of soft-key rows and soft-keys varies depending on the soft keys within the rows active screen layout.

• Page 827: Comparison: Differences In Manual Operation, Functionality

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Manual Operation, functionality Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Jog increment function The jog increment can be defined The jog increment applies for both…

• Page 828: Comparison: Differences In Manual Operation, Operation

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Manual Operation, operation Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Capturing the position values from Confirm actual position with a soft Actual-position capture by hard key…

• Page 829: Comparison: Differences In Program Run, Traverse Movements

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in Program Run, traverse movements NOTICE Danger of collision! NC programs that were created older controls can lead to unexpected axis movements or error messages on current control models.

• Page 830
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Q60 to Q99 (QS60 to QS99) areal- Q60 to Q99 (QS60 to QS99) Effect of Q parameters ways local. are local or global, depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs (.cyc).
• Page 831
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 The incremental rotation angle IPA Circle programming with polar The algebraic sign of the direc- and the direction of rotation DR…
• Page 832
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 SLII Cycles 20 to 24: Behavior with islands not Cannot be defined with Restricted definition in complex contained in pockets complex contour formula…
• Page 833
  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 PLANE function: TABLE ROT/COORD ROT Effect: Effect The transformation types are The transformation types are effective on all free rotary axes only effective with a C rotary…

• Page 834: Comparison: Differences In Mdi Operation

  Tables and Overviews | Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison: Differences in MDI operation Function TNC 620 iTNC 530 Execution of connected sequences Function available Function available Saving modally effective functions Function available Function available…

• Page 835
  M103….476 In a point table….. 731 Data bits……752 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle tool oriented……609 Handshake……753 revolution M136……. 477 Parity……..752 File Protocol……752 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 836
  Transfer values to the PLC.. 421 Nesting……..356 Interrupt machining….719 FN20: WAIT FOR Network connection….196 iTNC 530……..88 NC and PLC synchronization..Network settings…… 757 FN23: CIRCLE DATA HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 837
  Returning to the contour..733 Interrupt……. 719 Inclined-tool machining..563 Rotary axes……565 Mid-program startup…. 727 Incremental definition..551 Rotary axis Overview……717 Overview……537 Resuming after interruption. 723 Point definition….. 549 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 838
  Tool number……232 Workpiece positions….152 Taskbar……101, 136 Tool-oriented machining… 606 Workspace monitoring….. 715 TCPM……..573 Tool oversize Write to log……424 Suppress error message Writing probing values Log……..660 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 839
  To the datum table….661 ZIP archive……. 189 HEIDENHAIN | TNC 620 | Conversational Programming User’s Manual | 10/2017…
• Page 840
  The Information Site for DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH HEIDENHAIN Controls Dr.-Johannes-Heidenhain-Straße 5 83301 Traunreut, Germany  +49 8669 31-0  +49 8669 32-5061 Klartext App E-mail: info@heidenhain.de The Klartext on Your  +49 8669 32-1000 Technical support Mobile Device Measuring systems …